JP5396492B2 - Bullet ball machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a ball game machine configured to be capable of generating a pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect).

  Conventionally, a ball game machine performs a lottery lottery regarding a jackpot that is advantageous to the player when winning at the start opening, performs a stunning symbol variation display game with a variation display operation of decorative symbols by image display, During the game, various notice effects that reflect the results of the above-mentioned lottery are generated, thereby enjoying the game.

  In general, this type of ball game machine once has the right to start the symbol variation display game related to the establishment of the start condition when the game ball enters the start port and the start condition is satisfied during the symbol variation display game. Hold. The reserved start right is consumed after the current symbol variation display game is completed, and the next symbol variation display game is started. Such start rights are reserved and stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, a maximum of 4) as so-called “operation hold balls (hold data)”. In recent years, as a technique for expressing that there is a possibility of winning a winning game for an operation holding ball that has not yet been digested, taking advantage of the characteristic that the operation holding ball is held up to a predetermined number, it has straddled multiple symbol variation display games. A so-called “prefetching notice effect” is known in which the notice effect is continuously displayed (for example, Patent Document 1 below). That is, this pre-reading effect is an aspect of the notice effect that gives a notice of the result of the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future.

  As described above, the “pre-reading notice effect” is for the purpose of notifying the result of the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future, before the action-pending ball is used for the symbol variation display game (before the variation starts). , Whether or not the action-holding ball has won a big hit, and what kind of effects (for example, presence or absence of reach effect) will occur when the action-holding ball is used to execute the symbol variation display game It is necessary to perform “pre-reading determination”. Then, based on the content of the pre-reading notice effect based on the result of the “pre-reading determination” and the result of “determination at the start of variation” when the operation holding ball is actually used for execution of the symbol variation display game By matching the effect contents in the symbol variation display game as much as possible, the function of the pre-reading effect is provided as a notice effect for notifying the result of the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future.

Japanese Patent Application No. 2011-167886

  By the way, in the above prior art, at the time of the prefetch determination, the selection is made based on the “winning command distribution table selection table (FIG. 46 of Patent Document 1)” dedicated to the prefetch determination and the winning command distribution table selection table. A “winning command distribution table (FIGS. 47 and 48 of Patent Document 1)” is provided to determine a “prefetch variation pattern” that can specify the prefetch determination result, and a prefetch effect is generated based on the prefetch variation pattern. It is a processing procedure. On the other hand, at the start of variation, the “variation pattern distribution table selection table (FIG. 53 of Patent Document 1)” dedicated to the start of variation and this variation pattern are independent from the above-described tables at the time of prefetch determination. A “variation pattern distribution table first layer (FIGS. 54 and 55 of Patent Document 1)” selected based on the distribution table selection table is provided, a variation pattern at the start of variation is determined, and this variation start time On the basis of the variation pattern, the processing procedure is such that an effect is generated when the action-pending ball is actually used for execution of the symbol variation display game.

  However, in the conventional technology that follows the processing procedure as described above, since the tables used for “prefetching determination” and “determination at the start of change” are configured separately and independently, the amount of memory increases. As a result, there has been a problem that the control burden of the gaming machine increases.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a ball game machine capable of simplifying the processing due to the prefetch determination and reducing the control burden.

  The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means. The parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(1) When a game ball enters (wins) at the start opening (upper start opening 34 or lower start opening 35), it is determined that a plurality of types of variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 and 2) are hit. Acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information including a random number for use (random number for jackpot determination); (S314 in FIG. 10, S334 in FIG. 11)
A symbol display means (liquid crystal display device 36) for executing a stunning symbol variation display game accompanied by a game symbol variation display operation and deriving and displaying a display result;
Reservation memory for reserving and storing the predetermined game information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined maximum retentive storage number until being used for execution of the game symbol variable display operation Means,
A special game that is advantageous to the player by performing a lottery process based on the random number for winning determination under a predetermined on-holding digestion condition (satisfaction of the symbol variation display game start condition relating to the on-holding ball: processing route to S306 in FIG. 9). Lottery means for determining whether or not to generate a state (big hit lottery: S409 to S410 in FIG. 15);
Fluctuation pattern lottery means for performing a lottery process based on the lottery result of the lottery means and the plurality of types of random numbers for variation patterns, and determining the variation pattern of the game symbols from among a plurality of types of variation patterns (FIG. 15). S412),
Display control means (execution control unit 24) for performing execution control of the game symbol change display operation based on the change pattern determined by the change pattern lottery means,
After a specific result is derived and displayed as a display result of the symbol variation display game, in the bullet ball game machine configured to be able to generate the special game state,
A plurality of determination values related to a specific variation pattern random number among the plurality of types of variation pattern random numbers are assigned, and based on which determination value the specific variation pattern random number belongs to, A variation configured such that a variation pattern type can be determined from among a plurality of types of variation pattern types as a basis for a variation pattern operation in which the variation display operation of the game symbol is performed. A pattern type distribution table (distribution start and change distribution table (first layer): FIG. 47, FIG. 48)
The variation pattern type distribution table includes a variation pattern type distribution table for losing used when it is determined by the lottery means that the special gaming state is not to be generated (also used at the time of variation start at the time of winning for losing in FIG. 48). A distribution table), a winning variation pattern type allocation table used when it is determined by the lottery means that the special gaming state is to be generated, and a win winning variation variation allocation table in FIG. 47. Included,
The variation pattern lottery means
Fluctuation pattern type distribution table selection means (S442 to S443 in FIG. 19) for selecting either the variation pattern type distribution table for loss or the distribution pattern type distribution table for winning based on the lottery result by the lottery means. When,
The variation pattern is determined by a hierarchical process that has a hierarchical structure and is sequentially executed from the first layer, and the variation pattern type distribution table selection unit selects the variation pattern in the first layer. The variation pattern type distribution table is referenced to determine the variation pattern type based on the specific variation pattern random number (S444 to S445 in FIG. 19), and the plurality of types of variation patterns after the first layer. One variation among one or a plurality of types of variation patterns included in the variation pattern type based on the variation pattern random number other than the specific variation pattern random number among the random numbers for variation. Variation pattern determining means (S446 to S449 in FIG. 19) for determining a pattern,
Pre-fetch lottery means (S319 in FIG. 10, S339 in FIG. 11) for pre-reading to determine in advance what the lottery result by the lottery means will be before the lottery process by the lottery means is executed;
Before the lottery process by the variation pattern lottery means is executed, a prefetch variation pattern determination unit that pre-determines in advance which variation pattern type is determined by the variation pattern lottery unit. S323 in FIG. 10, S343 in FIG. 11, and
With the pre-reading determination result by the pre-reading variation pattern determining means as an effect start condition, a pre-reading notice effect for informing information related to the pre-read determination result to at least one of the symbol display means and the predetermined effect means appears Pre-reading notice control means for controlling (production control unit 24, FIG. 37),
The prefetch fluctuation pattern determination means includes
Based on the prefetch determination result by the prefetch lottery means, prefetch fluctuation pattern type distribution table selection means (S372 in FIG. 14) for selecting either the fluctuation pattern type distribution table for loss or the variation pattern type distribution table for winning. To S373)
With reference to the variation pattern type distribution table selected by the variation pattern type distribution table selection unit, the variation pattern type is determined by the variation pattern lottery unit based on the random number for the specific variation pattern. Pre-reading variation pattern type determination means (S374 to S375 in FIG. 14) for pre-determining whether to pre-read,
A ball game machine characterized by that.

(2) In the variation pattern type distribution table (FIGS. 47 and 48),
For each of the plurality of determination values, information related to the variation pattern type at the start of variation, in which the display control means can specify the variation pattern type necessary for executing the variation display operation of the gaming symbol, The prefetch notice control means is assigned information related to the variation pattern type at the time of prefetch determination that can specify the variation pattern type necessary for the appearance control of the prefetch notice effect, and is determined by the variation pattern lottery means. Of the plurality of determination values so that the variation pattern type at the start of variation and the variation pattern type at the time of the prefetch determination determined by the prefetch variation pattern determination unit are determined as the same variation pattern type. The variation pattern type is determined for each.
The bullet ball game machine according to (1) above, wherein

  (3) The means for determining the variation pattern type in the first hierarchy by the variation pattern determination means and the prefetch variation pattern type determination means have the same processing module configuration (S372 to S375 in FIG. 14, FIG. 19 of S442 to S445), the ball game machine according to (1) or (2) above.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the control burden concerning prefetch determination processing can be reduced.

It is a perspective view of the front side which shows the external appearance of the bullet ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the front side of the game board of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control apparatus of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the game state transition of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the prefetch notice effect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side timer interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start port check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 starting port check process in FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the random number determination process in FIG. 11 in FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a special stop symbol data creation process in FIG. 11 in FIG. 10. In FIG. 10, it is a flowchart which shows the starting opening winning random number determination process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the random-number determination process for special electric component operation | movement determination in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special stop symbol creation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer preparation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the second half part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electrically-powered article management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory operation | movement start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special winning opening opening / closing operation | movement setting process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the solenoid setting process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during operation of the special electric accessory in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory operation | movement continuation determination process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process according to the small hit special electric appliance operation status in FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a small hit game state transition preparation process in FIG. 31; It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side timer interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the pending | holding addition command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern designation | designated command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol designation | designated command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a figure which shows the hit random number determination table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol table selection table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the jackpot symbol table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the small hit symbol table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the lose symbol table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the offset correction process for a variation pattern selection at the time of winning which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the distribution table selection table combined use at the time of winning change according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the distribution table at the time of the variation start at the time of winning a prize which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the distribution table at the time of the variation start at the time of winning a prize for loses concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the list of the pending | holding addition commands which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table selection table for jackpot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table for jackpots concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the offset correction process for fluctuation pattern selection at the time of a fluctuation | variation start which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows the hit fluctuation pattern distribution table 2nd hierarchy based on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table 2nd hierarchy based on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the list of the hit fluctuation pattern commands which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the list of the loss fluctuation pattern commands which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern distribution designation | designated number table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special winning opening opening / closing operation | movement setting table selection table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the special winning opening opening / closing operation | movement setting table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table selection table for small hits concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table for small hits which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, a preferred embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a ball game machine according to the present invention.

<1. Outline of Configuration: FIGS. 1 and 2>
With reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the outline | summary of a structure of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the game board.

  First, with reference to FIG. 1, the structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 has a frame-shaped front frame 2 attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game is stored in a game board storage frame (not shown) attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. A board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted, and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 is faced to the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting a transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a.

  A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. When the key is inserted into the key cylinder and operated on one side, the glass door 6 is locked to the front frame 2. When operated to the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 54 can be released and opened to the front side.

  A front operation panel 7 pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) is disposed below the glass door 6. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 59 for storing discharged game balls.

  The upper tray unit 8 has a ball release button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 to the lower side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and pays out the game balls to a game ball lending device (not shown). And a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable medium inserted in the game ball rental device. In addition, the upper tray unit 8 is provided with a frame effect button 13 (manual operation means) that can be operated during a predetermined input reception period and that changes the effect when pressed during the input reception period.

  A firing operation handle 15 for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7. Speakers 46 that produce sound effects (sound effects) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and above the firing operation handle 15. In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 that provide a light effect by decoration of light are provided at various locations on the glass door 6.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 3 shown in FIG. 2 is mainly composed of a substantially square wooden plywood or resin board. As shown in the figure, the game board 3 is provided with a ball guide rail 5 that guides the launched game ball in a ring shape as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is formed. The game area 3a and the four corners are non-game areas.

  In the substantially central portion of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (design variation display areas), a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.) A liquid crystal display device 36 (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) is provided that is capable of variable display and stop display of the left symbol (corresponding to the left display area), middle symbol (corresponding to the middle display area), and right symbol (corresponding to the right display area). It has been. The liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects as images under the control of an effect control unit 24 described later.

  Further, a center decoration 48 is provided in the game area 3a so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a distant manner. The center decoration 48 protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and is a member that enables the flow path of game balls to be distributed to the left and right according to the strength or stroke length of the game balls. Distribution means). In the present embodiment, the center ornament 48 is arranged at the substantially central portion of the game area 3a, whereby a flow path of game balls is formed on both upper sides (left side and right side) in the game area 3a. ing. However, in the case of this embodiment, the center ornament 48 has a shape bulging slightly to the right.

  The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and is fixed to the game board 3 with a fixing screw or the like, and forms the outer periphery of the center decoration 48 and displays on the liquid crystal display device 36. An armor frame portion 48b surrounding the screen is integrally provided. The armor frame portion 48b protrudes substantially from the front mounting plate 48a to the front side, and prevents the game ball from entering the inside, that is, the liquid crystal display device 36 side. A play area through which a game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball is guided to the right side. The game balls driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32 are distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and the left down flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 and the right down flow path 3c on the right side. Flow down either. Such a center ornament 48 functions as a game ball drop direction changing member (drop direction changing means) that changes the fall direction of the game ball.

  Although not shown in the figure, the center decoration 48 is provided with a game ball that is entered from a entrance (not shown) provided on the left side of the armor frame 48b at the front lower portion of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the horizontal direction. The stage is provided so that it can freely roll and drop from the center in the left-right direction (starting port guide path) or from both the left and right sides. In addition, the center ornament 48 is provided with a movable body accessory (not shown) that provides a visual effect by its operation mode at an appropriate place.

  In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a function display section, and a 7-segment display (with dots) is started with the upper start port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower start. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) which are arranged side by side in correspondence with the mouth 35 (for the second special symbol). Is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the special symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of “special symbol” expressed by 7 segments (variation display operation in which variation start and variation stop are set as one set). It has become. Note that the liquid crystal display device 36 described above displays the decorative symbols by the image in a synchronized manner with the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in time. (The details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

  In the various function display units, a composite display device (holding composite display LED display) 38c including a 7-segment display (with dots) is disposed next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The combination was called the display of the number of balls with special action 1, the number of balls with special action 2, the number of balls with special action 2, the variable time shortening function is active (short time), and the high probability state (high probability) This is because it is a hold / short time / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as a hold composite display device) having five display functions called status notification.

  The various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality (two in this embodiment) of LEDs are arranged next to the LED display 38c for holding composite display. It has been. In the normal symbol display device 39a, the normal symbol variation display operation expressed by two LEDs (turns on and off alternately in a seesaw manner, and turns off when either side is lit to determine whether or not it is correct). ), The normal symbol variation display game is executed. In addition, a round number display device 39b formed by arranging three LEDs adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a is provided.

  Below the center decoration 48, an upper start opening 34 (first special symbol start opening) and a normal variable winning device 41 having a lower start opening 35 (second special symbol start opening) are provided above and below, Detection sensors 34a, 35a (upper start opening sensor 34a, lower start opening sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of the game ball are formed inside each.

  The upper start port 34, which is the first special symbol start port, is referred to as a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 1") in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device). FIG. 1 is a prize-winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and is configured as a winning-rate fixed-type winning apparatus that does not have a starting opening / closing means (means for opening or expanding the starting opening). Yes. In the present embodiment, a game ball dropping direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a is operated to the upper start port 34 to the left-down flow path 3b. The game balls that have flowed down the game are easy to win, whereas the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c have a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible to win.

  The normal variation winning device 41 is configured as a winning rate variation type winning device that can vary the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port by the starting port opening / closing means. Specifically, the lower starting port 35 is opened or enlarged. It is configured as a so-called “electric tulip-type” winning device including a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 to be enabled. The lower start opening 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol 2”) in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). The winning area of the lower starting opening 35 is an opening that facilitates winning according to the operating state (operating or non-operating) of the movable blade piece 47. It is converted into a state (easy winning state) and a closed state (winning difficult state) that makes it difficult or impossible to win than the open state. In this embodiment, when the movable blade piece 47 is inactive, the closed state is maintained such that a prize cannot be awarded to the lower start opening 35.

  On both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, there are four general winning ports 43, three on the left side and one on the right side, and a total of four general winning ports for detecting the passage of game balls. A sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed.

  Further, a normal symbol start opening 37 including a passing gate (specific passing area) through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally right above the normal variation winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c. . The normal symbol start port 37 is a winning port related to the normal symbol variation display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and a normal symbol start port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a passing game ball is provided therein. Is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start opening 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the left You may form only in the flow-down path | route 3b.

  In the middle of the path from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right flow path 3c, a special variable winning that is configured such that the big winning port 50 can be opened or expanded by the retractable opening door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a special winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 50 is formed therein.

  Around the big prize opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. Yes. And if the big prize opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (the big prize opening closed state), by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging part 55, the downstream guide part ( A part of the upper side 55a) is formed. In the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, more precisely in the game area above the big winning opening 50, the flow path correction plate is substantially parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. 51d is provided so as to move the flowing game balls toward the big prize opening 50.

  The process of entering a game ball into the big prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the play area between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5 projects on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. Come down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correcting plate 51d protruding from the surface of the game board 3, and thereby the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction of the big prize opening 50 (downward direction). At this time, if the special winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (the special winning opening is closed), the game ball rolls on the special winning opening in a predetermined arrangement (not shown). By the game nail, it is led in the direction of the tulip-type normal variation winning device 41 (lower start opening 35). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 is in a winning state (start opening open state), a game ball can win the lower start opening 35. On the other hand, if the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the special winning opening 50 is open (large winning opening opened state), the game ball is guided into the special winning opening 50. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player aims the launch position on the special variable prize winning device 52 side (when the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the upper start is performed. The game ball is difficult to be guided to the mouth 34 side or is not guided. Therefore, in the closed state of the big prize opening, unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 is operated, it is difficult or impossible to win the start openings 34 and 35.

  When the winning means described above belong to which of the left and right flow paths, that is, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c can be won, the winning means belonging to the left flow path 3b Has a top start port 34, a bottom start port 35, and three general winning ports 43 on the left side. The winning means belonging to the right flow down path 3c include the top start port 34, the bottom start port 35, and the normal symbol start port. 37, a large winning opening 50, and one general winning opening 43 on the right side.

  The lower start port 35 belongs to both the left flow down path 3b and the right flow down path 3c as long as the movable blade piece 47 is open (start port open state), and can be awarded from any of the left and right flow down paths. ing. However, since the movable wing piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 has the operating condition that the game ball passes (wins) to the normal symbol start opening 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a, it is substantially the right flow down. It can be said that it belongs only to the path 3c.

  In addition, the upper start port 34 generally belongs only to the left flow down path 3b or the left flow down path 3b, and it is difficult or impossible to win the game ball from the right flow down path 3c. That is, the arrangement of the game nail and other game parts in the game area 3a is the same as that of the game ball that has flowed down the left flow path 3b (including the game ball that has passed through the stage of the center decoration 48). However, the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c are arranged so as to form a guide path that is difficult to guide or does not guide to the upper start opening 34.

  Further, the big winning opening 50 belongs only to the right flow path 3c, and only the game balls from the right flow path 3c can win.

  Each winning opening such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the big winning opening 50, or the general winning opening 43 functions as a winning means arranged in the game area 3a. The detection switch (winning detection switch) such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the large winning opening sensor 52a, or the general winning opening sensor 43a is a game that has entered the winning means. It functions as a winning detection means for detecting a ball. The winning detection switch can be constituted by a non-contact switch such as a photo switch or a proximity switch, or a contact switch such as a micro switch.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, among the various winning holes provided in the gaming area 3a, if there is a winning in a winning opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37, it is promised for each winning opening. The number of winning balls per winning ball (for example, three for the upper start opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35, 13 for the large winning opening 40, 10 for the general winning opening 43) is the game ball payout device 19 (FIG. 3)). Note that the game balls that have not won the above winning holes are discharged from the game area 3 a through the out port 49. Here, “winning” is not a structure in which a winning opening takes a game ball inside, or a winning opening takes a game ball inside, but a winning opening made of a pass-through gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). If the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning slot, the winning prize will be “winning”. It is treated as having occurred. The game ball related to the winning is also referred to as “winning ball”.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device according to the game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

  The control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a main control unit (main control means) 20 that performs overall control (game operation control) related to game operations in general, and an effect control command from the main control unit 20. In response, an effect control unit (effect control means) 24 that comprehensively controls effect operation control (performance appearance control) for images, light, and sound, and a payout control board (payout control means) that performs payout control of prize balls. 29 and a power supply board (power supply control means) 31 that generates and supplies power necessary for the gaming machine from an external power supply (not shown). In addition, a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. In FIG. 3, the power supply route is omitted.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), a ROM 202 (main control ROM), and a RAM 203 (main control RAM). As a whole, a microcomputer (equivalent to a Z80 system) ). The ROM 202 stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program describing a game operation control procedure. The RAM 203 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for the progress of the game is stored and used according to the processing state. Although not shown, the main control unit 20 generates a random number for lottery relating to the special symbol variation display game, a periodic interrupt to the Z80 system, and a pulse output generation function (bit rate generator) with a constant cycle. And an interrupt controller circuit that includes an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt that provides an interrupt signal to the CPU. .

  Here, the CPU 201 is a CPU of Z80 (manufactured by Zylog or equivalent). Z80 is a CPU with a data bus of 8 bits and an address bus of 16 bits, but does not require a large memory space, and it is ideal for controlling pachinko machines that do not require high-speed processing or complicated numerical operation processing. It is. The CPU 201 is provided with a plurality of types of registers for reading and writing data necessary for executing processing. Specifically, the A register (accumulator), the F register (flag register), and the B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (general-purpose registers) that store general-purpose data are stored. PC register (program counter) storing data indicating the position of the program, SP register (stack pointer) storing the stack pointer (address indicating the current position of the stack area), and memory block of the RAM 401b performing the refresh operation R register (refresh counter) that stores data indicating IX, IX that stores data indicating a reference position when referring to the storage area of the RAM 401b, IY register (index register), and an interrupt to be referred to when an interrupt occurs Data register that stores data indicating the location of Only vector registers), main registers (A, F, B, C, D, E, H, L), auxiliary registers (A ′, F ′, B ′, C ′, D ′, E). ', H', L ') and dedicated registers (I, R, IX, IY, SP, PC).

  The main control unit 20 detects the passage of the upper start opening 34a for detecting the winning to the upper start opening 34, the lower start opening sensor 35a for detecting the winning to the lower start opening 35, and the normal symbol start opening 37. The normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, a large winning opening sensor 52a for detecting a winning at the large winning opening 50, and a general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting a winning at the general winning opening 43 are connected. Detection signals from these can be received.

  Further, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling opening and closing of the open door 52b of the large winning opening 50. And the main control unit 20 can transmit control signals for controlling them.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of the special symbol. The main control unit 20 is connected to a normal symbol display device 39a, and can transmit a control signal for display control of the normal symbol.

  In addition, a composite display device 38c is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of various information displayed on the composite display device 38c. The main control unit 20 is connected to a round number display device 39b, and can transmit a control signal for display control of a specified number of rounds by jackpot.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to an external concentration terminal board 21 for frames, and information relating to game progress (for example, information on winning big wins, information on the number of winning balls, information on the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed, etc.) Transmission to the hall computer HC via the terminal board 21 is possible. The hall computer HC is a management computer that comprehensively manages pachinko hall gaming machines, and is arranged outside the gaming machine.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a payout control board (payout control unit) 29. Connected to the payout control board 29 are a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 for controlling the launch device 32 and a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for paying out game balls. The main control unit 20 can send a payout control command (a payout control command for designating the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29. On the other hand, the payout control board 29 can transmit information related to the payout operation state (payout state signal) to the main control unit 20. On the main control unit 20 side, based on this payout state signal, whether or not the game ball payout device 19 is functioning normally, specifically, there is a problem in payout of award balls (payout error: for example, a ball jam or a prize It is monitored whether or not the ball is not paid out.

  Further, the main control unit 20 can transmit an effect control command carrying information related to the special symbol variation display game to the effect control unit 24. Such a production control command from the main control unit 20 is produced by one-way communication in order to prevent an illegal signal due to an external goto action from being input to the main control unit 20 via the production control unit 24. It is transmitted to the control unit 24.

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The production control unit 24 includes a microprocessor with a built-in CPU 241 (production control CPU), and is mainly configured by a microcomputer with a ROM 242 (production control ROM) and a RAM 243 (production control RAM). An interrupt controller circuit having an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a sound source IC, a CTC, and a timer interrupt is provided. The ROM 242 stores various data necessary for the rendering operation control in addition to the rendering control program in which the rendering control procedure is described. Further, the RAM 243 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for producing an effect is stored and used according to the processing state. The main roles of the production control unit 24 are reception of production control commands from the main control unit 20, selection of production based on production control commands, image display control of the liquid crystal display device 36, sound control of the speaker 46, decorative lamps. 45, LED light emission control, movable body accessory operation control, and the like.

  The effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display control of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit is an image ROM storing VDP (Video Display Processor) that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, and image data (effect image data) on which the VDP performs image development processing. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores image data developed by the VDP, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data necessary for the VDP to perform display control, and a display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU. A liquid crystal control ROM that stores the described program and various data necessary for display control thereof, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and a buffer memory are mainly configured.

  In addition, the production control unit 24 performs a light production and a sound production, a light display control unit for the light display device 45a including the decorative lamp 45 and the LED, a sound control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generation device 46a including the speaker 46, A drive control unit (motor drive circuit) for the movable body accessory motor 61 is provided.

  The effect control unit 24 is connected with a frame effect button 13 that can be operated by the player, and can receive an operation detection signal from the frame effect button 13. In addition, the effect control unit 24 is connected to an accessory motor 61 for controlling the operation of the movable accessory, and can transmit a control signal for controlling the movable accessory motor 61.

  The effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, and controls various effect means at a necessary timing. To do. Thereby, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, and the lighting and blinking driving of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED are realized, and various effect patterns are developed in time series. By doing so, a “production scenario” in a broad sense is realized.

  The effect control command defines a function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and an event (EVENT) of 1-byte length. In order to distinguish MODE from EVENT, MODE Bit 7 is Bit 7 of ON and EVENT is set to OFF. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and transmits the first strobe signal after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. I do. Furthermore, event (EVENT) information is set and output after the elapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second time of the strobe signal is transmitted after the elapse of the predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled by the CPU 201 to be in an active state for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 can reliably receive a command.

  Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal and executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing so that the effect control command is acquired in this interrupt processing. It has become. Unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process based on another interrupt (timer interrupt process executed periodically). Even in such a case, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if another interrupt occurs simultaneously.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a gaming operation according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol change display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, based on a predetermined start condition, specifically, the game ball enters (wins) the game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, the main control unit 20 The “big hit lottery” is performed by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in a variable manner to start the special symbol variation display game. Derived and displayed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

  Here, in this embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning to the upper start opening 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning to the lower start opening 35 are performed separately and independently. For this reason, the big hit lottery result regarding the upper start port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big hit lottery result regarding the lower start port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, on the condition that a game ball has entered the upper start opening 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variation display game is started. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, on the condition that a game ball has entered the lower start opening 35, the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol variation display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game is started in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, after the predetermined variation display time has elapsed, if the big win lottery result is “big hit”, it is in a predetermined “big hit” mode, otherwise In this case, the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in a predetermined “losing” manner, and thereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived.

  In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 38b side. The variation display game is referred to as “special symbol variation display game 2”. Unless otherwise required, “special symbol 1” and “special symbol 2” are simply referred to as “special symbols” (sometimes abbreviated as “special symbol”), and “special symbol variation display game 1” and “special symbol” The symbol variation display game 2 ”is simply referred to as“ special symbol variation display game ”.

  When the above-described special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol variation display game is started by variably displaying the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 36, and various effects are developed accompanying this. The When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorated design is derived. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the stunning ornamental symbol variation display game including the decorative symbol variation display operation.

  For example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is “big hit”, the decoration symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. In the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the special symbol is a big hit (for example, the 7-segment display state is “7”), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left”, “middle”, “right In each display area of “”, the display pattern in which the decorative symbol reflects “big hit” (for example, in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” display areas, the three decorative symbols are “7”, “7”, “ 7 ”display state).

  When the “big hit” is reached, that is, when the special symbol variation display game is ended, and the decorative symbol variation display game is ended, and as a result, “big hit” is derived, the special variation winning device 52 The special prize opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) is operated to open the opening door 52b in a predetermined pattern, whereby the special prize opening 50 is opened and closed, and a special game that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state. A state (big hit game) occurs. In this jackpot game, the number of game balls that have won a prize at the big prize opening (the big prize opening) until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 29.8 seconds, for example) elapses by the opening door 52b. 50 (the number of winning balls) is a predetermined number (maximum number of winnings: the maximum number of winning balls allowed for an opened winning opening is increased by one operation of an accessory: for example, 9) Until the value reaches the predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 15 rounds) where the winning area is opened or expanded and the big winning opening is closed when either of these conditions is met. Round) repeated. The condition for closing the special winning opening 50 is not limited to this, and it may be based only on the opening time of the special winning opening or only based on the number of game balls won in the special winning opening. Also good.

  When the jackpot game is started, an opening effect for informing that the jackpot is started is performed first, and after the opening effect is finished, the round game is performed a plurality of times with a predetermined number of rounds as an upper limit. Then, after the specified number of rounds is finished, an ending effect for notifying that the jackpot is finished is performed, and thereby the jackpot game is finished. In other words, the jackpot game is roughly divided into an opening effect, a round game, and an ending effect. However, the round game execution period excluding the opening effect period and the ending effect period in the closed state of the big prize opening may be regarded as a big hit game period.

  Regarding the information necessary for the execution of the decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 is based on the fact that a game ball enters (wins) the upper start opening 34 or the lower start opening 35. Whether the game is detected by the upper start sensor 34a or the lower start sensor 35a and the start condition (the start condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied, whether the game is “big hit” or “lost” A lottery lottery including a 'winning lottery' and a 'slotted lottery' that draws the type of jackpot if it is 'hits', and a 'symbol lottery' that draws the type of loser if it is 'losing'. Based on the above, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the special symbol (special stop symbol) to be finally stopped are determined. Then, as the effect control command for specifying the processing state, “variation pattern including special symbol variation pattern information (for example, information on the result of jackpot lottery result, variation time of special symbol, presence / absence of specific effect (for example, notice effect)), etc. The “designation command” and the “decoration design designation command” including information on the special stop symbol are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Thereby, basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24.

  The effect control unit 24 develops the effect during the decoration symbol variation display game based on information included in the effect control command (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decoration symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. The contents (production scenario) and the decoration symbol (decoration stop symbol) to be finally stopped and displayed are determined, and the decoration symbol is variably displayed according to the time schedule based on the variation pattern of the special symbol to execute the decoration symbol variation display game. As a result, the decorative symbols by the liquid crystal display device 36 are variably displayed in synchronism with the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game are in progress. Are substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generation device 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. Thereby, the reproduction of the image (image effect), the reproduction of the sound effect (sound effect), and the lighting and blinking drive (light effect) of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED, etc. are realized on the liquid crystal display device 36.

  In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display reflecting the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decoration symbol variation display game. These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as “symbol variation display games” unless otherwise required.

(3-1-2. Normal symbol fluctuation display game)
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the passing (winning) of the game ball through the normal symbol starting port 37, “main lottery” is performed by the random number lottery in the main control unit 20. Based on the lottery result, the normal symbol displayed on the LED is displayed in a normal symbol display device 39a in a variable manner to start a normal symbol variation display game. After a certain period of time, the result is converted into a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. And stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is “per assistance”, the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is turned on in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39 are on, or “O” and “ The display is stopped when the “○” side LED among the LEDs representing “x” is in a lighting state).

  When this "subsidiary hit" is reached, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is actuated, thereby opening the movable blade 47 in a reverse "C" shape and opening the lower start port 35. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to enter a state in which the game ball is likely to flow in (opening opening state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as “general power open game”) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this open electric game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 won the open time of the lower start opening 35 until a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses or the lower start opening 35 was won. Until the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), the winning area is opened or expanded, and when one of these conditions is satisfied, the lower start opening 35 is closed a predetermined number of times (for example, , Up to 2 times). The condition for closing the lower start opening 35 is not limited to this, and it may be based only on the opening time of the lower winning opening, or only based on the number of game balls won in the lower winning opening. Also good.

  Here, during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, during the regular symbol variation display game, during the big hit game, or during the open game, a prize is awarded to the upper start opening 34, the lower start opening 35 or the normal symbol start opening 37. When this occurs, that is, when a detection signal is input from the upper start sensor 34a, the lower start sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start sensor 37a, and the corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied, this embodiment Then, this is stored as data relating to the start right of each variable display game up to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, a maximum of four), except for those related during variable display. The pending data (holding data) that has not been subjected to the symbol variation display operation or a game ball related to the pending data is also referred to as an “operation holding ball”. In order to clarify the number of the operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a holding provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 Turn on the indicator. In the present embodiment, up to four operation holding balls relating to special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and normal symbol are each stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are held as the number of changes in the special symbol or normal symbol. In addition, the maximum memory | storage number of the number of operation hold balls regarding special symbol 1, special symbol 2, and a normal symbol is not restrict | limited in particular. In addition, the maximum number of memory for the number of operation-reserved balls different for each symbol may be set (for example, a maximum of four special symbols 1 side, a maximum of two special symbols 2 side, a maximum of six normal symbols side, etc. ). In addition, regarding the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the maximum number of stored operation-reserved balls on the symbol side where the profit obtained as a result of the big hit lottery is relatively high may be set. In the present embodiment, since the big hit lottery related to the special symbol 2 can obtain a big hit type with a high profit for the player (see FIG. 42 described later), for example, a maximum of four special symbols 2 side, a maximum special symbol 1 side It may be set to one.

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the jackpot that is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a “probability variation (hereinafter, abbreviated as“ probability variation ”) function” that the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) serves as a function unit. There are two types, a probability changing function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol probability changing function”) and a probability changing function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol probability changing function”).

  The special symbol probability changing function changes the probability of winning a lottery from a low probability (for example, 1/399) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 1/3 of 19.9). Is a function that generates an advantageous “high probability state”. Under the gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability changing function is in operation, the big hit lottery probability is high, so that the big hit is likely to occur. Therefore, it can be said that the gaming state expected by the player is a gaming state in which this special symbol probability changing function is operating. The details of the operation start condition and the operation end condition of the special symbol probability changing function will be described later.

  The normal symbol probability changing function changes the low probability (for example, 1/256) to a high probability (for example, 255/256) that the lottery probability per auxiliary is a predetermined probability (ordinary probability), so that it is more than the normal gaming state. This is a function for generating an advantageous “probability change state per auxiliary”. Under the game state in which this normal symbol probability changing function is operating (probability per assist change state), since the lottery probability per auxiliary is in a high probability state, auxiliary hits are likely to occur, and open-game games frequently occur. Thus, the operating rate is improved so that the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol probability changing function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol time-shortening function described later, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time-shortening function. This is the same condition as the operation end condition.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a “variable time reduction (hereinafter referred to as“ time reduction ”) function” that the main control unit 20 serves as a functional unit. There are two types of time-shortening functions relating to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol time-shortening functions”) and time-shortening functions relating to ordinary symbols (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol time-shortening functions”).

  The special symbol time reduction function shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change until it is fixedly displayed (average fluctuation time of the special symbol)). This is a function that generates a special symbol short-time state. Under the gaming state in which the special symbol time reduction function is activated (special symbol short time state), the average variation time of the special symbol in one special symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, the average time required for the variation without reach) Is reduced from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), a lottery number improvement state is achieved in which the number of big lotteries per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the special symbol short-time state does not occur, This is due to the control process.

  The normal symbol time shortening function is the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from the start of normal symbols to the final display (average fluctuation time of normal symbols)) This is a function to generate a shortened "normal symbol time short state". Under the game state in which the normal symbol short-time function is activated (normal symbol short-time state), the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, from 10 seconds to 1 second). In other words, the number of lotteries is improved so that the number of lotteries per auxiliary time per unit time is improved as compared with the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation time may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the normal symbol short-time state does not occur. This is due to the control process. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol short-time function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol short-time function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol short-time function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions.

  Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with an “open extension function” in which the main control unit 20 serves as a function unit.

  The open extension function is a function for generating an “open extension state” in which the opening operation period (at least one of the opening time and the number of opening times of the movable blade piece 47) of the movable blade piece 47 of the normal variation prize winning device 41 is extended. is there. This open extended state is referred to as a so-called “electric chew support state”. Under the gaming state (open extended state) in which the open extension function is operating, the opening operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from 0.2 seconds to 1.7 seconds, for example. The number of times of opening and closing is extended, for example, from once (when the opening extension function is not in operation) to twice (when the opening extension function is in operation), and the movable wing piece 47 per unit time than in the normal gaming state. The operating rate is improved so that the operating rate is improved. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the opening extension function is the same condition as the operation start condition of the special symbol time shortening function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time shortening function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions. Therefore, during the open extended state, the normal symbol probability changing function and the normal symbol time-shortening function also act, so that a gaming state in which the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is remarkably improved occurs.

  By operating one or more types of the functions as described above, it is possible to change the internal gaming state of the gaming machine. Here, in this embodiment, the operation start conditions of the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol short-time function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function, so each function operates at the same opportunity. Will do. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability changing function, the special symbol time shortening function, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time shortening function, and the open extension function are referred to as “probability changing state”. A gaming state from which the special symbol probability changing function is removed is referred to as a “short-time state”, and a gaming state in which only the special symbol probability changing function is activated is referred to as a “latent probability varying state (latent probability or latent probability state)”, and not all functions are in operation. The (non-operating) state is referred to as “normal gaming state”. Therefore, when paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, when the gaming state is the “short-time state” or “normal gaming state”, at least the jackpot lottery probability becomes the “low probability state”, and the gaming state becomes “latent”. In the case of “probability state” or “probability change state”, at least the big hit lottery probability becomes a “high probability state”. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned “time-short state” does not occur independently. Further, during the big hit, all functions are deactivated, and basically, the player is placed in the same gaming state as the normal gaming state.

(3-2-1. High base gaming state)
In the present embodiment, the functions related to the normal symbol, that is, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol short-time function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function. Will operate at the same opportunity. However, when attention is paid to the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time-shortening function, and the open extension function, respectively, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operating rate of the movable blade piece 47 is improved. Since the operating rate is improved and the winning frequency at the lower start opening 35 is increased, the gaming condition is that the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the big win lottery result is higher than the normal gaming state. "Base gaming state (starting condition improved state)". The “high base gaming state” here refers to a gaming state when a function relating to a normal symbol is activated, and a function relating to a special symbol, that is, at least one of a special symbol probability changing function and a special symbol time-shortening function is activated. It is different from the game state when doing.

  On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to special symbols (special symbol probability changing function and special symbol time-shortening function) individually, when the above special symbol probability changing function is activated, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “high probability state” higher than the normal gaming state. When the special symbol short-time function is activated, the special symbol variation display game has a “special symbol short-time state” in which the digestion time of the special symbol variation display game is earlier than the normal gaming state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the “high base gaming state” in which the starting frequency of the special symbol variation display game is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as an example of the “high base game state”, the electric chew support state provided with the open extension function is handled as the “high base game state”. Under the electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normally variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower start opening 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased. Therefore, the game state is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the electronic chew support state is not set (low base game state). When paying attention to the presence or absence of the electric chew support state, when the game state is “normal game state” or “latent probability state”, there is “no electric chew support state” (hereinafter referred to as “no electric support state”). When the game state is “time-short state” or “probability change state”, “electric chew support state exists” (hereinafter referred to as “electric support state”).

  In the present embodiment, one game state is further classified and managed in order to diversify the effects related to the game state. Specifically, the “normal gaming state” includes a plurality of types of “normal gaming state A (normal A)”, “normal gaming state B (normal B)”, and “normal gaming state C (normal C)”. A normal gaming state is included and managed as different gaming states. That is, even in the same normal game state, the conditions (variation pattern selection mode) for selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol are different. As a result, the operating status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time shortening function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time shortening function, and open extension function) related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability or the presence or absence of electric support, etc. When attention is paid to the “game state”, while there are the same “normal game state”, with regard to the production, there are a plurality of types of game states “normal A” to “normal C” (variation pattern selection mode (variation of FIG. 57 described later). An effect corresponding to each pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)) can be generated. Furthermore, in this embodiment, while the internal gaming state is the same “latency state”, the production is managed as “normal A”, “normal B”, or “normal C”, and the above-mentioned normal gaming state It is possible to generate effects corresponding to the same gaming state as “Normal A” to “Normal C” (details regarding transition conditions of each gaming state and special variation patterns for specifying the contents of the effects will be described later) To do). The types of “internal gaming state” when focusing on the functions related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability and the presence / absence of electric support in the present embodiment include a normal gaming state, a latent probability state, and a probability variation state, and The types of “game state” (types of variation pattern selection mode) when attention is paid to the determination of effects include normal A, normal B, normal C, and probability change state.

  In this way, in this embodiment, the internal gaming state is managed by managing the gaming state (internal gaming state) focused on the jackpot lottery probability and the presence / absence of electric support as different from the gaming state focused on the production determination. Even if they are the same, a plurality of types of effect modes can be realized. Thereby, the variation of the production under the same internal game state can be made rich. In the present specification, unless otherwise required, the internal gaming state and the gaming state when attention is paid to the determination of the effect are handled in the same row.

<4. About winning>
Next, “winning” of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

(4-1. Type per hit)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to perform a big hit lottery for a plurality of types of hits. The hit types include "15R long open probability variable big hit", "10R long open positive variable big hit", "2R short open latent big hit", and "small hit (small hit A, small hit B, and small hit C)" Includes multiple types of hits.

  Among these hits, “15R long open probability change big hit”, “10R long open probability change big hit”, and “2R short open latent change big hit” are hits belonging to the “big hit” type that triggers the operation of the condition device. "Is a hit belonging to the" non-big hit "type that does not trigger the condition device. Here, the “condition device” is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, in which a combination of specific special symbols is displayed or a game ball is displayed. The one that operates when it passes a specific area in the big prize opening. Both the hits belonging to the “big hit” type and the hits (small hits) belonging to the “non-big hit” type are hits that trigger the transition to a special gaming state involving opening / closing operations of the big prize opening. Therefore, hits belonging to the “non-big hit” type are different from simple “losing”.

  Of the hits belonging to the above-mentioned "big hit" type, "15R long open probability change big hit", "10R long open probability change big hit", and "2R short open probability big hit" have at least a high probability of the gaming state after the big hit game ends. It is a big hit that belongs to a “probability big hit” to be shifted to a gaming state with a state (in this embodiment, a probability variation state or a latent probability state). Note that “small hit” is a hit belonging to the “non-big hit” type, but unless otherwise necessary, it is treated as one of the big hit types in the same row without being distinguished from the above big hit.

(4-2. Per game)
Next, the winning game based on each hit described above will be described.

(4-2-1.15R long opening chance change hit game)
A winning game with a 15R long open probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “15R probability variable big hit game”) is a big hit with a prescribed number of rounds of 15 rounds. In this embodiment, the winning prize port 50 in one round game is The maximum opening time is set to “29.8 seconds” of “long opening time”. Here, the “long open time” means that there is a possibility that the number of winnings in the big winning opening within the time will reach the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9) (the possibility of reaching the maximum number of winnings is sufficient). It is determined as a time span.

  After the round game is started and the grand prize opening 50 is opened, when the above maximum opening time elapses, the big prize opening 50 is closed and the current round game is finished, and the prescribed round number of 15 rounds is reached. If not, after a predetermined time (interval between rounds) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. However, even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, if the number of game balls (the number of winning balls) won in the big winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number (for example, nine), the big winning opening 50 is closed. After the current round game is over and a predetermined time (inter-round interval time) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. In other words, when the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed, or when the number of game balls won in the grand prize opening reaches the maximum number of winnings, the opened big prize opening is met Is closed and the game is shifted to the next round game after a predetermined interval time (the same applies to the winning game by 10R long opening probability change big hit described later, and the winning game by 2R short opening latent big hit) . The above-mentioned “interval time between rounds” between round games is “remaining ball discharge time” and “interval time before opening” after the remaining ball discharge time elapses until the next round game starts. Consists of. The above “remaining ball discharge time” refers to an extra time (for example, 1980 ms) for discharging the remaining balls inside the big winning opening after the closing of the big winning opening. As the time width, the big winning opening is closed. Sufficient time is required until the game ball won immediately before passing through a winning detection switch (large winning opening sensor 52a) formed in the large winning opening. Also, the “interval before opening” means that after the above-mentioned remaining ball discharge time has passed and the remaining balls in the big winning opening are considered discharged, the big winning opening in the next round game is released. Time width (for example, 20 ms). Even if the big prize opening sensor 52a detects a game ball during this pre-opening interval, the game ball is treated as invalid.

(4-2-2.10R Long Opening Probability Hit Game with a Big Hit)
The winning game by 10R long open probability variable big hit (hereinafter referred to as “10R positive variable big hit game”) is the same as the content of the 15R positive variable big hit game described above except that the prescribed number of rounds is ten. Therefore, the 10R probability variable big hit game is a big hit game to which a relatively lower profit is given than the 15R probability variable big hit game (in this embodiment, there is a difference in the number of winning balls for five rounds).

(4-2-2R winning game with short open latency big hit)
In a win game based on 2R short-open latency big hit (hereinafter referred to as “2R latent big hit game”), the number of rounds is a big hit with 15 rounds. The maximum opening time of 50 is set to 0.1 seconds of “short opening time”. Here, the “short opening time” is defined as a time span in which it is difficult to win a prize winning itself. In the present embodiment, one of the conditions for closing the big prize opening is within the “short opening time”, depending on the performance of the launching device (for example, the continuous shooting speed performance of game balls per unit time) and the formation position of the big prize opening. It is impossible to reach the “Maximum Wins”. In 2R latent big hit games, the big winning opening 50 is only opened for a short time and the number of round games is as small as two rounds, so it is a big hit game with virtually no winning balls. (Accurately, there is a possibility that a winning of the big winning opening 50 may also occur, but since the maximum opening time of the big winning opening of each round game is set to a short opening time, the possibility is extremely low. Virtually no prize balls can be obtained).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the number of award balls in the big hit game, in other words, the number of game balls that can be obtained by the player (the number of winning prize balls) is different according to the type of the big hit. Yes. In addition, although it has been described that the maximum opening time is set to the short opening time in the 2R latent large hit game, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same long open time as 15R probability variable big hit game or 10R probability variable big hit game may be set so that a winning to the big winning opening 50 is allowed to some extent, and it is difficult or impossible to reach the maximum winning number. Although it is possible, it is set to an opening time (an intermediate opening time shorter than the long opening time and longer than the short opening time: for example, 5 seconds) that can secure a certain number of winning balls to the big winning opening 50. May be. In order to vary the number of winning balls, the maximum winning number may be set to a different number according to the type of jackpot.

(4-2-3. Winning game with small hits (A per small hit-C per small hit))
In a hit game with a small hit A to a small hit C (hereinafter referred to as “small hit game”), the big prize opening 50 is opened twice, and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 50 per round is 2R. It is set to 0.1 seconds, which corresponds to the maximum opening time of the game with a large probability of winning, and the interval time from the closing of the first winning port 50 to the opening of the second winning port 50 is 2R. The same time width as the interval time is set. Also, regarding the closing condition of the big winning opening 50 in the small hit game, whether the maximum opening time has elapsed or the number of game balls won in the big winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number (for example, 9) Either one of the conditions is satisfied. This is also the same as the 2R latent big hit game. That is, during the small hit game, the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening 50 captured from the appearance is controlled in substantially the same operation mode as that of the 2R latent big hit game.

  Since this “small hit” is a hit type that does not trigger the operation of the “condition device”, a round game like “big hit” is not executed. However, by controlling the opening and closing of the big prize opening 50 in substantially the same manner of operation as the 2R latent big hit game, a pseudo round game was realized, and it seemed as if the 2R short open big hit big win was won. It is possible to dress like In addition, the hit effect during the small hit game (the effect that appears during the hit game) has the same or very similar effect as the hit effect during the 2R latent large hit game. In other words, the operation related to the small hit game including the hit effect shows substantially the same behavior as the operation related to the 2R short open latency big hit, and which hit game is executed as viewed from the player side. Identification is difficult or impossible. As a result, even if the player wins a small hit, the player can be given a sense of expectation for winning the 2R short open latent big hit.

(4-3. Game state after the end of the game)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the gaming state to be transferred after each winning game will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state that shifts after each winning game.

(Game state after 4-3-1.15R probable big hit game ends)
After the 15R-probability big hit game, as shown in the figure, regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit winning, it is shifted to the “probable change state”. In this “probable change state”, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of special symbol variation display operations (hereinafter abbreviated as “special symbol variation frequency”) is a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, The total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (the total variation number of the special symbols 1 and 2) (the same applies hereinafter): for example 70 times) The jackpot is determined until the game ends or within the predetermined number of times ( When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a big hit and the occurrence of the big hit game is confirmed. (It may be the case that the big hit is won. The same applies hereinafter) The probability variation state continues until the predetermined number of times. When the special symbol variation display game is finished without confirming the big hit, the probability variation state is terminated, and the next game is shifted to “normal A (internal game state is normal game state)”. There. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a special symbol variation display game that has been completed a predetermined number of times without winning a big hit (excluding the small hits) after being shifted to a gaming state in which the big win lottery probability is at least high. This is a probability-variation machine (number-of-times probability variation machine (ST machine)) that terminates the high probability state and shifts the jackpot lottery probability to a low probability. Hereinafter, the upper limit number of the special symbol variation display game (special symbol variation number) in which the high probability state is continued is referred to as “specified ST number” as necessary.

(4-3-2.10R probable big hit game state after game end)
After the 15R probability variable big hit game, the game state is shifted to the “probability changed state” regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit, and the game state transition after this probability changed state is the same as in the case of the 15R probability variable big hit described above.

(4-3-3.2R gaming state after the end of the game with a big hit probability)
After the 2R latency big hit game, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of the big hit win. Specifically, when the game state is “normal A” to “normal C” at the time of winning the big hit (when the internal game state is the normal game state or the latent state), “normal C (internal game state) Is in the “probability state”), if it is “probability change state”, it is shifted to “probability change state”. The “normal C” here is managed as the same gaming state as the “normal C” in which the internal gaming state is the normal gaming state as described above, but the substance is that the internal gaming state is in the latent state. “Normal C (latency)”.

  When the game becomes “normal C” after the 2R latent big hit game ends, the big hit is made until the special symbol variation display game is finished for the first predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) or within the predetermined number of times. The “normal C” continues until it is confirmed, and when the special symbol variation display game is finished without confirming the big win within the predetermined number of times, the “normal C” is ended, and the next game is changed to “normal A”. To be migrated. That is, when the specified number of STs is divided into the first half section and the second half section, the first half section is placed under “normal C” and the second half section is placed under “normal A”. Therefore, when the transition is made from “normal C” to “normal A”, the internal gaming state is shifted to “normal A” in the latent state.

  The number of executions of the special symbol variation display game including “normal C” in the first half section after the above-described latent state becomes “normal A” or until the end of the specified ST number (70 times), or “Normal A” continues until the big hit (including small hits) is confirmed within the specified number of STs, and the special symbol variation display game is terminated without the big hit (including small hits) being determined within the specified number of STs. Sometimes, the high probability state ends, and the next game shifts to “normal A” in the normal game state. In other words, after the “normal C” is reached after the 2R latent big hit game ends, if the big win is not won within the specified number of STs (for example, 70 times), the internal game state is “normal C” in the latent state. (Special symbol variation display game execution count 30 times) ”→“ Normal A (special symbol variation display game execution count 40 times) ”in the same state (ST specified number of times completed) → Internal game state is“ normal game state ” Game state transition such as “A”.

  As described above, the “15R long open probability change big hit” is transferred to the first big hit game, and after the first big hit game is finished, the first privilege that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state. It functions as a “first jackpot” for shifting to the gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state). In addition, the above “10R long open probability change big hit” is the second big hit in which the opening / closing operation pattern of the big prize opening is controlled so that the profit provided to the player is relatively less than the first big hit game. It shifts to a game, and functions as a “second jackpot” that shifts to the first bonus game state after the end of the second jackpot game. In addition, the above “2R short-opening latent big hit” is a third game in which the opening / closing operation pattern of the big prize opening is controlled so that the profit provided to the player is relatively less than the first big hit game. The second bonus game state (in this embodiment, “latency probability”) is transferred to the jackpot game, and the profit provided to the player is relatively less than the first bonus game state after the end of the third jackpot game. It functions as a “third jackpot” for shifting to the state “).

  In this embodiment, the “short-time state” is not generated even if any big hit is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fourth big hit (short-time big hit) that generates the short-time state after the big-hit game ends. ) May be provided. In this case, the condition for ending the short-time state is that the special symbol variation display game is executed until the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) ends or until the big hit is confirmed or won within the predetermined number of times. can do. In this embodiment, at least when the game is shifted to the high probability state, the special symbol variation display game is executed until the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game ends a predetermined number of times (the number of specified STs), or the big hit is confirmed or won in the predetermined number of times. It was explained that the high probability state continues until However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a fifth jackpot may be provided that continues the high probability state until the next jackpot is confirmed or won regardless of the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game. The contents (game form) of the big hit game by the fourth big hit or the fifth big hit described above may be the same as or different from the contents of the first to third big hit games. There may be one or more types of jackpots that trigger the transition to the “probability change state”, “latent probability state”, or “short-time state”.

(4-4. Game state after the small hit game)
Next, the gaming state after the small hit game will be described. Here, after the small hit game, the internal game state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is. That is, the transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small win is not performed. For this reason, both the internal game state at the time of winning the small hit and the internal game state after the small hit game are the same internal game state. This is different from “big hit” in which the transition control of the internal gaming state can be performed. However, in this embodiment, the transition control of the “internal gaming state” due to the small win is not performed, while the transition control of the “gaming state” is performed. Thereby, for example, when the game state after the small hit game and the game state after the 2R latent large hit game are shifted to the same game state, it is possible to stay in the effect mode in which both perform the same effect. That is, even after the small hit game, it is possible to generate an effect under the same effect mode as after the 2R latent large hit game. As a result, the player can be given a sense of rushing into a high-probability state that the player may win the 2R short-release latent big hit and move to the “latent state”. ing. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 4, the game state after each small hit game when the small hit A to small hit C is won will be described in detail.

(4-4-1. Game state after the small hit game when the small hit A is won)
After the small hit game by the small hit A, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination varies depending on the game state at the time of the big hit win. Specifically, when the game state is “normal A” to “normal C” at the time of winning the big hit, it is transferred to “normal B”, and when it is “probability change state”, it is transferred to “probability change state”. It is like that. When the “normal B” is reached, the “normal B” continues until the special symbol variation display game ends a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or until the big hit is determined within the predetermined number of times. However, when the special symbol variation display game is completed without determining the big hit within the predetermined number of times, the “normal B” is ended and the next game is shifted to “normal A”.

(4-4-2. Game state after the small hit game when winning the small hit B)
After the small hit game by the small hit B, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of the big hit win. Specifically, when the game state is “normal A” to “normal C” at the time of winning the big hit, it is transferred to “normal B”, and when it is “probability change state”, it is transferred to “probability change state”. It is like that. In the case of “normal C” due to the small hit B, until the special symbol variation display game ends for the second predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) or until the big hit is confirmed within the predetermined number of times. When the “normal C” continues and the special symbol variation display game is finished without the big hit being determined within the predetermined number of times, the “normal C” is ended and the next game is shifted to “normal A”. It is like that.

(4-4-3. Game state after the end of the small hit game when winning the small hit C)
After the small hit game by the small hit C, as shown in the figure, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of the big hit win. Specifically, the game state “normal A” to “normal C” at the time of winning the big hit is transferred to “normal C”, and when it is “probability change state”, the game state is changed to “probability change state”. It is like that. In the case of “normal C” due to the small hit C, the special symbol variation display game is played for the third predetermined number of times (preferably, “the second predetermined number of times <the third predetermined number of times” and “the first predetermined number of times”). Number of times satisfying at least one of the relationship of “predetermined number of times = third predetermined number of times” (in this embodiment, for example, 30 times) until the end or until the big hit is determined within the predetermined number of times “C” continues, and when the special symbol variation display game ends without the big win being determined within the predetermined number of times, the “normal C” ends, and the next game is shifted to “normal A”. ing. Accordingly, the “normal C” transferred due to the above-mentioned small hit C winning and the “normal C” transferred due to the above small hit B winning are in the same gaming state. However, the stay period of “Normal C” ends in 30 special symbol fluctuation display games (“Normal C (30 times)” in the figure) or 15 times (“Normal C (15 in the figure)”) Times))).

  Here, the above-mentioned “normal C” is a gaming state that can be shifted to even after the 2R latent probability winning game is over. For this reason, when the mode is shifted to “Normal C” due to the 2R short open latency big win, small B win, or small C win, each of the production modes (“Normal C”) is produced. Will be in the “normal C effect mode” described later), and whether or not the internal game state is the “latency state” in the effect, that is, whether the jackpot winning probability state is a high probability state or a low probability state It is concealed. In this embodiment, although there is a difference in the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function between the normal gaming state and the latent probability state, it is noted that the mechanical gaming operation state that appears on the appearance is the same state (both are ' By preventing the player from perceiving what kind of gaming state from the stage of production, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of a high probability state. Yes. In particular, if the special symbol variation display game is ended 15 times without winning a big win or a small win, and the next game also stays in a production mode corresponding to “normal C”, the small win C win is won. Or because it is limited to whether or not 2R short open latent big hit is won, the expectation that “normal C (30 times)” may have entered a higher probability state than “normal C (15 times)” Will increase further.

  Even in the case of transition from “normal C” to “normal A”, in order to leave the player with a high probability state expectation, the “normal C” continuation count is less than the specified ST count. Preferably there is. Further, according to the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of variations of the special symbol), not only the transition from the “normal C” to the “normal A” but also the special symbol variation display game while staying in the “normal C”. After the predetermined number of executions have been completed, a predetermined transition lottery is performed each time the special symbol variation display game is executed. If the transition lottery is won, the transition from “normal C” to “normal A” Also good. For example, if 2R short open latency probability change big hit or small hit C is won, after the first predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times), the transition lottery is performed, and if small hit B is won, the second predetermined number of times After finishing (for example, 15 times), the above-mentioned transfer lottery is performed. Furthermore, it is preferable to forcibly shift to “normal A” when the special symbol variation display game ends without winning the transition lottery until the specified number of STs ends.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, an effect mode (effect state) corresponding to each gaming state will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an effect mode that provides an effect related to the current gaming state is provided, and it is configured to be able to go back and forth between the effect modes. Specifically, during the “normal A” stay, a “normal A effect mode” that produces an effect related to this, while during a “normal B” stay, a “normal B effect mode” that produces an effect related thereto, A “normal C effect mode” that produces an effect related to this during the “normal C” stay, and a “probable change effect mode” that produces an effect related to this during the “probable change state”. There are various types of performance modes. In addition, the “normal C effect mode” corresponding to the “normal C” is an effect in which the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) is concealed and the player is given an expectation of a high probability state. Plays the role of “secret mode”.

  The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a function unit (effect state transition control means) that controls the transition of the effect mode, and a specific effect control command (game state designation command) sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201). ), It is configured such that transition control between these effect modes is possible in a form that maintains consistency with the gaming state managed on the main control unit 20 side.

  Also, in each effect mode, the background display as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative symbol is, for example, “normal” so that the player can understand what kind of game state the player is staying in. Under the “A production mode”, a background production reminiscent of the season “spring” (for example, a background production in which a background image of a cherry tree is displayed: the first background production), and under the “normal B production mode”, the season “summer” is associated. Background effect (for example, background effect for displaying a background image of the sea: second background effect), under the “normal C effect mode”, a background effect reminiscent of the season “autumn” (for example, a background image of an autumnal tree) Displayed background effect: 3rd background effect) Under “Probability change effect mode”, a background effect reminiscent of the season 'winter' (for example, a background effect displaying a snowy mountain background image: a fourth background effect) Is Toggles control.

  Note that the “normal C effect mode” of the present embodiment is the same effect mode regardless of whether the internal game state is the latent state (high probability state) or the normal game state (low probability state). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, a “variation pattern designation command” or “decoration pattern designation command” including internal game state information, or a “game state designation” including only internal game state information. By transmitting the “command”, the “genuine normal C performance mode (first secret performance mode)” under the latent state (high probability state) and the normal gaming state (low probability state) according to the jackpot lottery probability ) The transition control to the “Gasse normal C effect mode (second secret effect mode)” below may be possible. In this configuration, when the internal game state is in the normal game state and the normal game state is maintained by winning the small hit B or the small hit C, the “normal C effect mode” above “ When the game mode is shifted to the “genuine C effect mode” and the internal game state is won in the 2R short open latency large hit during the normal game state or the latent state, It is possible to shift to the “normal C effect mode”. Then, while making both background effects the same (for example, a background effect reminiscent of the season 'autumn'), the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) is kept secret, for example, the “Gase's normal C effect” The “genuine normal C effect mode” is currently higher than the “mode” by increasing the probability of occurrence of a specific effect (implying that there is a possibility of a latent state and implying a latent expectation effect to be implied). A player can be given an inference element as to whether or not the player is in a probability state. Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved further.

(5-2. Advance notice)
Next, the notice effect will be described. During the symbol variation display game, various notice effects related to the above-described effect mode can be generated. Such effects include “button notice effect”, “prefetching notice effect”, etc., in addition to the notice effect such as “reach effect” and “pseudo-ream”. These performance modes serve as “scoring effects” for raising the player's expectation of winning a big hit.

(5-2-1. Reach Production)
The “reach effect” refers to an effect mode that accompanies the reach state, and specifically refers to an effect mode that displays the final result via the reach state. This “reach state” means that some of the decorative symbols derived and displayed in the middle of the decorative symbol variation display game will generate a big hit (winning win) before the result of the decorative symbol variation display game is derived. It is a display mode in which a decorative pattern that has not yet been derived and displayed is displayed in a state that constitutes a part of the display mode to be displayed, in other words, a display mode that indicates the occurrence of jackpot is easy to be derived Is a variable display mode that can be associated with the player. For example, when the combination of decorative symbols indicating the occurrence of a big hit (winning winning) is “7 (left symbol)”, “7 (middle symbol)”, and “7 (right symbol)”, the decorative symbol is displayed on a predetermined hit effective line. Is a part of the display mode indicating that the jackpot is generated (winning winning) (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol indicate “7”, so-called “listening state (reach symbol)) However, a display mode in which the finally derived result does not necessarily indicate the occurrence of jackpot, for example, “7 (left symbol)”, “7 (middle symbol)”, “7 (right symbol)” is derived. However, a decorative symbol that has not yet been derived and displayed (here, a middle symbol that does not form a hearing state (reach symbol)) is stopped, rocked, enlarged, reduced, or deformed continuously for a predetermined period of time. However, in the stage before the final result is displayed, It refers to the state or the state in which the possibility of the occurrence is continuing. Therefore, even if the reach state is formed, the result of the decorative symbol variation display game does not necessarily become “big hit”, but the finally derived result shows a stop display mode (for example, “7 (Left symbol) "" 7 (middle symbol) "" 7 (right symbol) "), the game result of this time is" lost ".

  The above “reach effect” suggests a jackpot winning expectation indicating the degree of expectation of whether or not a big win has been won, and includes a plurality of types of reach effects associated with the big win winning expectation. For example, when a specific reach state appears, there is a case where the big hit winning expectation is relatively higher than when a normal reach state ('normal reach (N reach)') appears. Such reach production with a specific reach state is referred to as 'super reach (SP reach)'. Many of these SP reaches have a longer production time (variation time) than the N reach in order to increase the expectation of a big hit. In addition, in the above reach production, in addition to N reach and SP reach via the reach state, it is assumed that the non-reach effect (so-called “normal fluctuation”) that does not go through the reach state, and finally derived results ( Reach effect (sudden hit reach effect) that strikes the player's intention, such as a combination of decorative symbols) is a stop display mode showing a big hit, a predetermined variation time through or without going through the reach state In addition, it is possible to include a premium reach effect (full-reach reach effect) such as performing a variable display while maintaining the display mode showing the big hit and notifying the big hit winning decision.

  The reach effects of this embodiment are provided with the following types of reach effects. First, reach production can be broadly classified as “N-reach, weak SP reach A, weak SP reach B, strong SP reach A, and strong SP reach B” for “normal A” or “normal B”. "Special reach" type dedicated to "definite change", "reach during probability change" type dedicated to "probability change state", and the like. These reach production types include one or more types of variation patterns. For example, “weak SP reach A type” is “weak SP reach A1 to A3”, “weak SP reach B type” is “weak SP reach B1 to B3”, and “strong SP reach A type” is “strong”. SP Reach A1 to A3 ',' Strong SP Reach B Type 'is' Strong SP Reach B1 to B3', 'Special Reach' Type is' Special Reach 1 to 3 ' Includes 'probability reach 1 to 3' (see, for example, FIGS. 55 and 56).

  The expectation degree for winning a big hit in the reach effect varies mainly depending on the selection rate of the reach effect and the gaming state. For example, the probability of winning a big hit is high because of the relationship of “N reach <weak SP reach A <weak SP reach B <strong SP reach A <strong SP reach B” between different reach types. The larger the number, such as weak SP reach A1 <weak SP reach A2 <weak SP reach A3, the higher the big win winning expectation. Note that the actual degree of big hit winning expectation varies depending on whether other notice effects are involved. For this reason, for example, even when the weak SP reach appears, if a notice effect with a high expectation level for winning a big hit is involved, the expected degree of winning a big win can be the same as the strong SP reach.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-ream production (pseudo-ream))
“Pseudo-ream” refers to an effect that involves a quasi-continuous variation display state (pseudo variation) of a decorative symbol. Specifically, part or all of a decorative symbol is temporarily suspended during a decorative symbol variation display game. By repeating the display operation such as executing the decorative symbol re-variation operation from the temporarily stopped state once or multiple times, it seems that the variable operation to be set as a set is executed multiple times. This refers to a variable display mode as expressed. When performing this pseudo-variation, re-variation operation is performed after a temporary stop state with a combination of symbols that are temporarily lost while forming a reach symbol, or a special decorative symbol (the occurrence of a pseudo-ream) is replaced with a normal decorative symbol. By including a special decorative design (pseudo continuous activation chance design) that suggests the possibility and performing a re-variation operation after a temporary stop state, including a special decorative design, In some cases, the player may be informed that a pseudo-variation is or is likely to be made. This “pseudo-run” is mainly generated before the reach state is formed, and when a part or all of the stop symbols constituting the combination of stop symbols in the temporary stop state are formed in the reach state A pseudo-variation operation is performed while suggesting that there is a possibility that a combination of reach symbols may be configured, and after the pseudo-variation is completed, a final game result is derived via the reach state. . That is, the “pseudo-ream” is mainly used as a notice effect that informs that there is a possibility that a reach effect will be generated. This is one aspect of the production of swearing that suggests the degree of expectation) and instigates the expectation of winning a big hit. However, the final game result may be derived without going through the reach state after the pseudo variation is completed. In other words, in the production mode involving pseudo-reams, 'pseudo-ream production with' pseudo-ream production 'and' pseudo-ream + non-reach production (normal fluctuation) 'with non-ream production with pseudo-ream (Normal fluctuation with pseudo-ream) 'is included.

  Here, the fluctuation display developed after the pseudo fluctuation is completed is also referred to as “main fluctuation”. For example, in the case of going through the reach state, the reach state is formed by the main fluctuation and the final game result is obtained. Will be derived. In the case of the production mode accompanied by the pseudo-ream and the reach production, different production modes of “pseudo-run” and “reach production” are combined. Unless otherwise required in the book, reach production with pseudo-ream is treated in the same way as “reach production”.

(5-2-3. Button notice effect)
The “button notice effect” refers to an effect mode in which the content of the effect can be changed depending on whether or not the player has operated the frame effect button 13, and the so-called “player participation type” effect mode. Say. In the “button notice effect”, information for prompting the player to operate the frame effect button 13 is notified during a predetermined operation reception period, and whether or not the frame effect button 13 is operated at this time. Depending on whether or not, the subsequent production changes, for example, the appearance of the character currently appearing or the occurrence of a special sound effect may indicate the expectation of winning a big hit It can be done. Such a “player-participation-type” performance mode can give the player a feeling as if he / she has influenced the game result, so that the fun of the game can be increased.

(5-3. Pre-reading notice effect)
In addition, it is indicated in advance that there is a possibility of winning a big hit for an operation holding ball that has not yet been provided for execution of the symbol change display game (special symbol change display operation). There is a pre-reading notice effect to inform. Regarding the pre-reading notice effect, first, in the main control unit 20, when an operation holding ball is generated (at the time of winning a prize), a big hit lottery related to the operation holding ball (on condition that the execution start condition of the symbol variation display game is established) “Lookup lottery at the start of change”: pre-fetched jackpot lottery that determines in advance what will be the result of S409 in FIG. ("Read-ahead big hit determination" executed on condition that the operation holding ball is generated and the start condition is satisfied: see S319 in FIG. 10 and S339 in FIG. 11 (random number determination processing)).

  Furthermore, by using the pre-fetched lottery lottery result, it is possible to pre-determine in advance what kind of variation pattern the special symbol will have when the activated ball is subjected to the variation display operation. Selection lottery (referred to as “prefetch variation pattern” hereinafter) (refer to prefetch variation pattern determination: S323 in FIG. 10, S343 in FIG. 11 (random determination process at start-up winning prize))). In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, for example, a reach variation pattern for specifying a reach effect via a reach state (hereinafter referred to as “variable pattern with reach”) or a non-reach effect that does not involve a reach state It is determined in advance whether a normal variation pattern for designation (hereinafter referred to as “normal variation pattern”) is obtained. Since the prefetch variation pattern is determined using at least the winning lottery result, the prefetch variation pattern information transmitted to the production control unit 24 side includes not only the variation pattern type but also the variation pattern at the start of variation. In addition, information on whether it is a “hit fluctuation pattern” at the time of winning a big hit (including a small hit) or a “losing fluctuation pattern” at the time of winning a loss can also be included. When information on the result of the pre-reading determination (hereinafter referred to as “pre-reading determination”), that is, pre-reading variation pattern information is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 relates to the pre-reading notice effect. An effect control process is performed.

  Specifically, when the “hold addition command” including the information of the prefetch determination result is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24 and the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command, the prefetch determination included in the command is performed. An effect control process related to the pre-reading notice effect based on the content of the result is performed. However, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect by lottery, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect can be executed, the symbol variation display that is performed at the timing when the operation holding ball is generated or first. At the same time as the start of the game or at a predetermined timing during the game, a pre-reading notice effect for the current operation holding ball is displayed.

  Note that the “look-ahead variation pattern” obtained by the pre-reading determination at the time of the operation holding ball occurrence is not necessarily the “variation pattern at the start of the variation” itself obtained when the operation holding ball is actually subjected to the variation display operation. There is no. For example, the presence / absence of reach production will be described as a representative example in which the variation pattern at the start of variation is a variation pattern designating “strong SP reach A1”. In this case, the look-ahead variation pattern is not the type of reach production of “strong SP reach A1”, but the “strong SP reach A” type, which is the essence of the variation pattern at the start of the variation. It is specified that it is a “strong SP reach A type” in which fluctuation patterns (strong SP reach A1 to A3) of the same system called “strong SP reach A” are grouped. Therefore, the main information notified by the pre-reading notice effect is that the probability of winning a big hit is high or low, in other words, the expectation of winning a big hit is relatively high with respect to a symbol variation display game to be executed in the future. It is information on whether the possibility of production is high or low, and such information is notified to the player in advance before the operation holding ball is digested, so that only the symbol variation display game of this time In addition, the interest of the player is also improved for the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future, and the fun of the game is improved.

(5-3-1. Pre-reading notice effect mode: FIGS. 5 and 6)
Next, referring to FIG. 5 and FIG. 5 and 6 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the prefetching notice effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and show an example of the prefetching notice effect.

  First, referring to FIG. 5, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation holding ball on the special symbol 1 side is partly in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the drawing, below the display area of the decorative symbol). A holding display area 76 for displaying the number and a holding display area 77 for displaying the number of the operation holding balls on the special symbol 2 side are provided. : “○ (white circle mark)” in the figure)) or in the light-off state (no operation hold ball: circle in the broken line in the figure), information on the current number of the operation hold balls is notified (see FIG. 5 (A)). .

  The display regarding the presence / absence of the operation holding ball (hereinafter referred to as “holding display”) is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and a maximum of four holding displays can be displayed in each holding display area 76, 77. (See FIG. 5 (b)). Specifically, in each of the hold display areas 76 and 77, the leftmost action hold ball is the action that occurred first (that is, the oldest) on the time axis among all the action hold balls in the hold display. Displayed as a holding ball. In the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, on-hold display units a1 to d1 (icon images) each including a hold icon (icon image) provided in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 by the same number (four) as the maximum hold storage number. Special symbols 1 side), a2 to d2 (corresponds to special symbols 2 side). These hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 are normally switched to the operation state (lighted state) by the same number, for example, three, as the number of operation hold balls existing when the prefetch determination is made. Therefore, this hold display unit functions as a hold display means for displaying the number of hold operations. However, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the hold display mode of the corresponding one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined prefetch notice display mode (dedicated hold display mode). As a result, this works as a means for generating a pre-reading notice effect.

  When receiving the hold addition command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 performs a pre-reading notice lottery for drawing whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is performed as part of the display control process related to the hold display. Do. In this pre-reading notice lottery, the action-holding ball related to the winning becomes the action-holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (for example, the hold display portion b2 that is hatched in FIG. 5 (a) corresponds). In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice lottery execution condition is based on the condition that there is no reach variation pattern type in the pre-reading variation pattern related to the existing operation holding ball. This is in order to avoid the fact that other reach effects intervene in the middle of the pre-reading notice effects that are continuously generated, the original look-ahead notice effects are cut off, and the effect of the effects becomes dilute. . The winning probability of the above-mentioned pre-reading notice lottery is higher than that of “losing”, and the probability of winning a hit type with a relatively high expectation degree of winning big wins is higher. Depending on whether or not to do, winning expectation degree to the big hit is shown.

  When the pre-reading notice lottery is won, among the holding icons in the holding display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the holding icon that is the object of the prefetching notice is notified from, for example, the blue color of the normal holding display. A “holding display changing system” pre-reading notice effect is performed in which the display changes to a special holding color such as yellow, green, red, or rainbow. Here, the blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors on the hold icon mean that the winning expectation is high in the order of these colors. (Accurate) This is a premium hold icon. This reserved color is determined by lottery based on the contents of the prefetch fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the “big hit” is more likely to be selected than the “losing”, and if the reach type has a relatively high expectation degree for winning the big hit, the reserved color having the higher expected degree of winning the big hit is selected with a high probability. It has become. Note that the pre-reading notice effect mode of the “holding display changing system” is not limited to changing the holding color as described above, but may be changed to an icon imitating a special character. Such “holding display changing system” pre-reading notice effect is displayed when an operation holding ball is generated, and is therefore referred to as a “winning change system” pre-reading notice effect.

  Here, the existing operation holding balls are digested with the execution of the symbol variation display game. At this time, in order to express that one operation hold ball has been consumed, the display position of the hold display portion corresponding to the existing operation hold ball is moved up (sequentially shifted to the left), and the display number is reduced. Although the control is performed, the above-described hold display mode different from normal continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display. In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the above-mentioned hold display change system (change system at the time of winning) is an aspect of “continuous notice effect” in which a dedicated notice effect is displayed across a plurality of special symbol variation display games. It can be said that there is.

  Also, in the present embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned “previous change system” pre-reading notice effect, it is possible to present a “variation start changing system” pre-reading notice effect that is triggered by the start of the symbol variation display game. It has become. The “change start time change system” pre-reading notice effect is, for example, displaying a pre-reading-only notice image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, which is executed over a plurality of symbol fluctuation display games and continuously displayed. This is a pre-reading notice effect of “image display change system”. In other words, the pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system” is a symbol variation display game related to establishment of a start condition when a game ball wins a start opening and a start condition is satisfied during one symbol change display game. The right to execute is temporarily stored, and a pre-reading notice lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a pre-reading notice effect is to be performed. Make the variable display game an expression with some relevance. For example, in all the symbol variation display games related to the existing operation hold ball from the oldest operation hold ball to the pre-read notification target operation hold ball in the storage order, a pre-read-only notice image is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. . In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the “variation start change system” is the same as the “previous change system” pre-reading notice effect. It can be said that this is one aspect of the “notice effect”.

  In addition, the execution form of the pre-reading notice effect can be set to the following form. (B) Run only the winning change system (holding display changing system), (b) Run only the change start changing system (image display changing system), (c) Winning change system (holding display changing system) And a plurality of execution modes such as executing both the change start time change system (image display change system) and the like. Therefore, even if the “previous change system” look-ahead notice effect appears, the “variation start change system” look-ahead notice effect does not necessarily appear, and vice versa. Even when the “system prefetching notice effect” appears, the “change system upon winning” may not necessarily appear. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect of “change system at winning (holding display changing system)” and the pre-reading notice effect of “change system at start of change (image display changing system)” can be generated simultaneously. What kind of execution mode is used can be determined as appropriate.

  Also, during execution of the pre-reading notice effect of the winning change system (holding display change system) and / or (at least one of the meanings) during the change start time changing system (image display change system) Independently, the operation of the movable body accessory (not shown) may be performed in a pre-read-only operation pattern. In the same way as the “previous change system at the start of change” and “previous change system at the time of winning”, the effect by this movable body accessory also appears as a special notice effect across multiple special symbol change display games. It can be said that it is an aspect of “continuous notice effect”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the pre-reading notice effect mode woven by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

  In the figure (1), during the symbol variation display game (“↓” in the figure indicates that the ornamental symbol is being varied and displayed), the upper start opening 34 is won to win the special symbol 1 side operation holding ball. Suppose that the number has become three, and among the third, the action holding ball on which the second movement start operation is executed is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (in this case, the pre-reading notice lottery and change of the winning change system) This shows a case in which a winning change was made in the pre-change notice lottery at the start. In addition, here, it is assumed that the first operation hold ball previously held and the third operation hold ball held later are operation hold balls that have not been pre-selected for the pre-reading notice lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 1A, the production control unit 24 displays a hold display of the second operation hold ball that has been subject to the pre-read notice, and a hold display dedicated to pre-read that is different from normal (hereinafter, “dedicated hold display”). (Referred to as). At this time, the hold display corresponding to the first and third operation hold balls that are not subject to the pre-reading notice is maintained as a normal hold display (hereinafter referred to as “normal hold display”). In the figure, when the display mode of the hold display of the second operation hold ball subject to the pre-reading notice is changed from the normal hold display (white circle (◯) mark) to the dedicated hold display (hatched circle). Show. This notifies the player that the pre-reading notice effect has been started. FIG. 1 (1) shows that the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is finished and the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed with “246” (the result is “lost”).

  The game progresses to (2) in the same figure, and the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol variation display game based on the operation reservation ball on the special symbol 1 side which is the first (oldest operation reservation ball). The action control ball 24 digests the action hold ball, and the production control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each action hold ball to the left with the start of the special symbol variation display game. It is set as the hold display mode which shows the state digested by one, and the decoration symbol fluctuation display game based on the first operation hold ball is started. At this time, as a pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system”, a background image for the pre-reading notice effect (for example, a lightning effect by displaying a lightning image simulating lightning: a dedicated notice image) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. Display. Thereby, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 has a display mode as shown in FIG.

  Then, the game progresses to FIG. 3 (3), and the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is terminated and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with “351” (the result is “lost”).

  Subsequently, the game progresses to FIG. 4 (4), and the main control unit 20 plays a special symbol variation display game based on the second operation holding ball, that is, the operation holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. The action control unit 24 starts and digests the operation hold ball, and at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation display game, the production control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each operation hold ball to the left, respectively. The decorative symbol variation display game based on the actuated holding ball is started. At this time, the “dedicated hold display” of the change system at the time of winning disappears from the screen at the time of the shift, and is terminated when the current symbol variation display game is started (with the digestion of the operation hold ball). In addition, a special notice image (in this case, lightning effect) of the change system at the start of the change is ended at the end of the generation in the symbol change display game. FIG. 4 (4) shows the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 immediately after the start of the symbol variation display game. In this way, a series of pre-reading notice effects has been completed. After that, if there is a roaring effect (pseudo-ream or reach effect (SP reach)) that increases the expectation level for winning a big hit during this symbol variation display game, the expectation for the big hit is combined with the content of the pre-reading notice effect. The feeling will be further enhanced.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate the pre-reading notice effect as described above as one aspect of the continuous notice effect. Thereby, since the variation of production can be made rich, the fun of the game can be improved.

  In addition, various effects by the pachinko gaming machine 1 are displayed by the rendering means provided in the gaming machine. Any directing means can be employed as the directing means in the present invention as long as it is a stimulus transmitting means that can appeal to human perception such as vision, hearing, and touch. Light generating means such as a decorative lamp 45, LED device, speaker 46, and liquid crystal display device 36, sound generating device, effect display device, or a vibrating device that transmits vibration to the operator's body, or a movable body having a visual effect An example of such a feature is a representative example. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the eye like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it also includes an image-independent display device (for example, a 7-segment display). The term “image display device” refers mainly to a type that produces an effect by displaying an image, and a device that produces an effect other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is included in the concept of the effect display device. In addition, the operation of the frame effect button 13 (manual operation means) is not performed in a specific period (for example, a part or all of the period during which a roaring effect with a relatively high expectation degree for winning a big hit is occurring) , To prevent the frame effect button 13 from being pressed), or to provide special effect means placed in a difficult operation state (for example, making it difficult to press the frame effect button 13), or to vibrate the manual operation means. An exciting device may be provided.

<Processing on Main Control Unit Side: FIGS. 7 to 33>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 7 to 33, the game operation process on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described. The main control unit 20 side mainly includes a predetermined main process (main control side main process: FIG. 7) and a timer interrupt process (main control side timer interrupt process: activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC). 8).

<6. Main process on the main control side: FIG. 7>
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control unit 20 side. The main process starts when the power is turned on without operating the initialization switch (not shown), such as when recovering from a power failure, and when the initialization switch is turned on. May turn on. In any case, when the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a voltage is supplied to each control board by the power supply board 31, and the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) starts the main control side main process shown in FIG. .

  In the main control side main process, the CPU 201 first executes a necessary initial setting process before starting the gaming operation (step S11). For example, it first sets itself to an interrupt disabled state, sets it to a predetermined interrupt mode (interrupt mode 2), and initializes register values in the CPU including each part of the microcomputer.

  Next, the state (ON, OFF) of the RAM clear signal which is an output signal of the RAM clear switch input through an input port (not shown) is determined (step S12). Here, the RAM clear signal is a signal for determining whether or not to initialize the entire area of the RAM, and usually has a value corresponding to the ON / OFF state of the initialization switch operated by the store clerk of the pachinko parlor. doing.

  Here, assuming that the RAM clear signal is in the ON state, the determination result in step S12 is “YES”, and the entire area of the RAM is cleared to zero (step S16). Therefore, the value of the backup flag set at the time of power-off becomes zero together with other checksum values.

  Next, a “RAM clear display command” for notifying that the RAM area has been cleared to zero is transmitted to each control board as an initialization command (step S17). Then, for example, 30 seconds is stored in the RAM clear notification timer as a time for notifying that the RAM has been cleared (step S18).

  Next, the CTC that outputs an interrupt signal for starting the timer interrupt operation is initialized (step S19), and the CPU is set in an interrupt enabled state.

  Thereafter, the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state are repeated until an interrupt occurs, and various random number update processes are executed during that time (steps S20 to S22). In this various random number update processing (step S21), various random numbers used in special symbol variation display games and normal symbol variation display games (random numbers related to jackpot lotteries circulating through a predetermined numerical range by increment processing (used for symbol lottery) Random numbers used for changing the initial value (start value) of the random numbers for special symbol determination) and random numbers related to lottery per auxiliary (random numbers for determining per-subject winning lottery per auxiliary) The initial value random number for determination and the initial value random number for determination per auxiliary) and the random number for variation pattern used for selecting the variation pattern are updated.

  In the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, a special symbol determination random number counter initial value generation counter, a special symbol determination counter, and the like as various random number counters used for symbol lottery related to jackpot lottery, supplementary lottery, or variation pattern lottery, etc. There are provided a random number counter, a counter for generating an initial value per auxiliary sub-counter, a counter for determining auxiliary sub-random numbers, a random number counter for variation pattern 1, a random number counter for variation pattern 2, and the like. These counters serve as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. In the various random number update processing in step S21, two initial value generation counters for generating initial values of the special symbol determination random number counter and the auxiliary hit determination random number counter, a variation pattern random number 1 counter, and a variation pattern random number 2 The counter is updated to generate the above various soft random numbers. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the variation pattern random number 1 counter is 0 to 238, a value is acquired from the count value storage area for generating the value of the variation pattern random number 1 in the RAM 203, and 1 is acquired as the acquired value. After adding, it is stored in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 239, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters are updated in the same manner. The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processes except during a timer interrupt process that is executed intermittently.

  Returning to the determination process in step S12, the description will be continued. At the time of recovery from the power failure state, the initialization switch (RAM clear signal) is in the OFF state (step S12: YES). Therefore, in such a case, the backup flag value is determined following the determination processing in step S12 (step S13). Note that the backup flag is set to the ON state (backup flag = 5AH ('** H' means any hexadecimal number) when the power is cut off), and the backup flag is set to the OFF state (backup) in the first timer interrupt processing after the power is restored. The flag is reset to 00H).

  Therefore, when the power is turned on or when recovering from a power failure, the backup flag should normally be in the ON state. However, the backup flag is reset (OFF) if the predetermined processing is not completed before the power is cut off for some reason. Therefore, when the backup flag is in the OFF state (step S13: NO), the process proceeds to step S16 and the operation of the gaming machine is returned to the initial state.

  On the other hand, if the backup flag is in the ON state (step S13: YES), a checksum calculation for calculating a checksum value is executed. Here, the checksum operation is an 8-bit addition operation for the work area of the RAM 203. When the checksum value is calculated, the calculation result is compared with the stored value at the SUM address in the RAM 203 (step S14). The SUM address stores a checksum value obtained by the same checksum calculation when the power is turned off. The stored calculation result is maintained by a backup power source together with other data of the RAM 203. Therefore, originally, both should match according to the determination in step S14.

  However, if the checksum operation could not be executed when the power was turned off, or even if it can be executed, the data in the work area may be damaged before the checksum operation of the main process is executed. In such a case, the determination result in step S14 is inconsistent. If data corruption is detected due to a discrepancy between the determination results (step S14: NO), the process proceeds to step S16, RAM clear processing is executed, and the operating state of the gaming machine is returned to the initial state. On the other hand, if the checksum value obtained by the checksum operation matches the stored value at the SUM address (step S14: YES), the stack pointer before power shutoff is restored based on the backup data, and processing at power shutoff is performed. The game restoration process necessary to start the game from the state is executed.

  When the game restoration process of step S15 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of step S19, the CTC is initialized and the CPU is set to the interrupt enabled state. Thereafter, the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state are set until an interrupt occurs. In the meantime, the above-described various random number update processes are executed (steps S20 to S22).

<7. Main control timer interrupt processing: Fig. 8>
Next, a timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main control timer interruption process. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 4 ms) from the CTC, and interrupted and executed during execution of the main control side main process. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the address value (including data described in the address) when the CPU 201 reads / writes the main memory such as RAM and ROM, the result information obtained by the arithmetic processing on the program, etc. A process such as reading into and taking in a CPU built-in register is sometimes referred to as “acquisition”, and when the CPU 201 accesses a work area of the RAM and stores predetermined data is sometimes referred to as “storage”.

  In FIG. 8, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first saves the contents of the register in the stack area, and then performs a power supply abnormality check process for monitoring the power supply state from the power supply control board 31 (step S51). In this power supply abnormality check process, it is monitored mainly whether power is normally supplied. Here, for example, when an abnormality such as a power interruption occurs, a backup process is performed in which predetermined game information at the time of power interruption is stored in the RAM so that the game can be restored without any trouble when the power is restored.

  Next, a timer management process for managing a timer used for game operation control is performed (step S52). Timer values of various timers (for example, special symbol accessory operation timer described later) used for game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are managed (updated) here.

  Next, input management processing is performed (step S53). In this input management process, information detected by various sensors provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the winning counter. Here, the detection information by the various sensors is output from winning detection switches such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the like. ON / OFF information (winning detection information) of the switch signal. Thereby, it is monitored for each interrupt whether or not a winning is detected (a winning has occurred) at each winning opening. The “winning counter” is a counter provided corresponding to each winning opening and counting the number of game balls (winning balls) won. In the present embodiment, in a predetermined area of the RAM 203, an upper start opening winning counter for the upper starting opening 34, a lower starting opening winning counter for the lower starting opening 35, a normal symbol starting opening winning counter for the normal pattern starting opening 37, a large A prize winning counter for the prize winning opening 50 and a prize winning counter for the general winning opening 43 for the general winning opening 43 are provided. Further, in this input management process, it is also monitored whether or not there is an illegal prize based on whether or not the detection information from the prize detection switch has won a prize during a period in which the prize should be allowed. For example, when the lower starting port sensor 35a detects a game ball even when the movable wing piece 47 is not operating, or when the big prize opening sensor 52a detects a game ball even when the big hit game is not being played. Assuming that this is an illegal prize, the winning detection information is invalidated, and a predetermined error process is performed in an error management process (step S55) described later to notify the outside of the invalidation.

  Next, random number management processing within a timer interrupt for periodically updating the random numbers related to each variable display game is performed (step S54). In this periodic random number update process, a special symbol determination random number or auxiliary per-subject determination random number is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt), and a process for changing the start value of the random number counter is performed each time the random number counter makes a round. For example, the value of the special symbol judgment random number counter is updated (added by +1) within a predetermined range, and the special symbol judgment random number counter initial value generation counter value is read each time the special symbol judgment random number counter makes one round. The value of the generation counter is stored in the special symbol determination random number counter. As a result, the start value of the special symbol determination random number counter is changed according to the value of the generation counter, so that the count value of the special symbol determination random number counter is random while the update cycle is constant.

  Next, an error management process for monitoring the presence or absence of abnormality in the game operation state is performed (step S55). In this error management process, as abnormalities in the game operation state, for example, it is monitored whether or not a disconnection has occurred between the boards, or whether or not there is an illegal winning, and these abnormal operations (errors) ) Occurs, predetermined error processing corresponding to the error is performed. As the error processing, for example, the progress of a predetermined game operation (for example, a game ball payout operation or a game ball launch operation) is stopped, or an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 to generate the effect means. To notify that an error has occurred.

  Next, a prize ball management process is performed (step S56). In this winning ball management process, the data stored in the above input management process is grasped, the winning counter is checked, and if there is a winning, a payout control command for specifying the number of winning balls is issued as a payout control board (payout). Control unit) 29. Upon receiving this payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 to perform a payout operation for the designated number of prize balls. As a result, the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning mouth (a predetermined number of winning balls per winning ball promised for each winning mouth × the number of winning balls corresponding to the value of the winning counter) is paid out. Yes.

  Next, normal symbol management processing is performed (step S57). In this normal symbol management process, a lottery per auxiliary in the normal symbol fluctuation display game is performed, and based on the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol and the stop display mode of the normal symbol are determined, or blinking is repeated every predetermined time. Create normal symbol data (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol variation), and if normal symbol is not varying, create data for stop display (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol stop display) Or The normal symbol management process functions as an auxiliary game lottery unit and a normal symbol display unit (normal symbol display control unit) for controlling the normal symbol variation display operation.

  Next, the ordinary electric accessory management process is performed (step S58). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, the generation of an excitation signal for solenoid control for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a necessary for the generation of the open electric game based on the lottery result of the auxiliary symbol lottery in the normal symbol management process (step S57). And the data (solenoid control data) is set. Based on the data set here, an excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a in a solenoid management process described later, whereby the operation of the movable blade piece 47 is controlled. Note that the ordinary electric accessory management process functions as an auxiliary hit control means.

  Next, special symbol management processing is performed (step S59). In this special symbol management process (hit determination means), the big symbol lottery in the special symbol variation display game is mainly performed, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (prefetch variation pattern, variation pattern at the start of variation) based on the lottery result. And special stop symbols. Details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, special electric accessory management processing is performed (step S60). In this special electric utility management process, when the big hit lottery result is “big hit” or “small win”, a setting process necessary to execute and control the hit game corresponding to the win is performed. Details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, right-handed notification information management processing is performed (step S61). In this right-handed notification information management process, if the high-base gaming state of “electric support is present” occurs (in this embodiment, the probability variation state), the “launching position guidance effect” that reports the right-handed instruction information. (Right-handed notification effect) "is displayed. The right-handed instruction information here is, for example, instruction information that prompts the normal symbol start opening 37 to win a prize, and specifically, is information that instructs to aim at the right flow path 3c as a launch position. Typically, an image that prompts the player to “right-hand” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, a character display of “right-hand”), or a sound effect that prompts the player to make a right-hand strike (for example, “ Or “Right-handed”. The case where the right-handed information is notified is a case where it is presumed that the player accidentally targets the launch position on the left flow path 3b side in the state where the electric support is present. The case where a winning occurs at the upper start opening 34 or the case where no winning occurs at the normal symbol starting opening 37 even after a predetermined time elapses. In such a case, in this right-handed notification information management process, a “right-handed instruction command” for instructing execution of the firing position guidance effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command. The control unit 24 is configured to control the appearance of the launch position guidance effect.

  Next, LED management processing is performed (step S62). In this LED management process, display data is output to the normal symbol display device 39a and the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. Thereby, the change display and stop display of a normal symbol and a special symbol are performed. It should be noted that the normal symbol display data created in the normal symbol management process in step S57 and the special symbol display data update process (step S309 in FIG. 9 described later) in the special symbol management process in step S59. Display data is output by this LED management process.

  Next, external terminal management processing is performed (step S63). In this external terminal management process, the operation state information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output to an external device such as a hall computer HC or an island lamp through the frame external concentrated terminal board 21. The above-mentioned operation state information includes that a big hit game has occurred (condition device has been activated), that a small hit game has occurred, that a symbol variation display game has been executed (a special symbol variation display game has started or ended) Information), information such as winning information (the effect of winning at the start opening or the big winning opening, and information on the number of winning balls).

  Next, solenoid management processing is performed (step S64). In this solenoid management process, an excitation signal output process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c based on the solenoid control data created in the ordinary electric accessory management process in step S58, and a special electric accessory management process in step S60. Excitation signal output processing for the special winning opening solenoid 52c based on the solenoid control data is performed. Thereby, the movable wing piece 47 and the open door 52b operate in a predetermined pattern, and the lower start opening 35 and the big winning opening 50 are opened and closed.

  After the above steps S51 to S64 are completed, the saved register contents are restored (register restoration process), and the interrupt enabled state is set (step S65). Thus, the timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process before the interruption, and the main control side main process is performed until the next timer interruption occurs.

(8. Special symbol management processing: Fig. 9)
Next, the special symbol management process (step S59) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol management process in step S59.

  In FIG. 9, the CPU 201 first performs a special figure 1 start port check process for the special symbol 1 side (upper starter port 34 side) (step S301), and then a special symbol for the special symbol 2 side (lower starter port 35 side). 2. A starting port check process is performed (step S302).

  When the start opening check process in steps S301 to S302 is completed, the state of the small hitting flag is determined (step S303). This “small hitting flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a small hit game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not being played.

  When the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S303: ≠ 5AH), the state of the condition device operation flag is then determined (step S304). The “conditional device operation flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the big hit game is not being played.

  When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, neither the small hit game nor the big hit game (step S303: ≠ 5AH and step S304: ≠ 5AH) In accordance with the symbol operation status (00H to 03H), processing related to the special symbol variation display operation is performed (step S305: special symbol operation status branching process). On the other hand, if the small hit game is being played (step S303: = 5 AH) or if the big hit game is being played (step S304: = 5 AH), the processing related to the variable symbol display operation of steps S306 to S308 is not performed. It progresses to the special symbol display data update process of step S309. Therefore, when either the small hit game or the big hit game, the special symbol variation display operation is not performed (the special symbol display state of the special symbol display device is displayed after the small hit or after the big hit) As it is). The “special symbol operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol. This status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

  In the special symbol operation status branching process of step S305, depending on which status value the special symbol operation status is “waiting (00H, 01H)”, “changing (02H)” or “confirming (03H)”. The processing corresponding to each is executed.

  Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is “standby (01H)”, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) is performed. When the special symbol variation status is “varying (02H)”, the special symbol variation is performed. If the middle process (step S307) is “under confirmation (03H)”, the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) is executed. By these processes, a change display operation that sets a change start and a change stop of a special symbol is realized. Here, “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next change, and “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). The above-mentioned “under confirmation” indicates that the special symbol has been changed and is stopped (confirmed) and is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). When the processes in steps S306 to S308 are completed, the process proceeds to a special symbol display data update process in step S309 described later.

  In step S309, special symbol display data management processing is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating. If it is fluctuating, special symbol data (special symbol) that repeats blinking every predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). If the special symbol is not changing, data for stop display (data for 7-segment blink display during special symbol stop display) is generated. The special symbol display data created here is output in the LED management process (step S62) of FIG. 8, and the special symbol variation display and stop display on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. Thus, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process in step S60 of FIG.

(8-1. Special Figure 1 Starting Port Check Processing: FIG. 10)
First, the special figure 1 starting port check process (step S301 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 1 starting port check process in step S301. This special figure 1 start opening check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and as a pre-start process for executing the special symbol variation display game 1, the operation holding ball Processing such as number addition processing, various random number storage processing, and pending addition command creation processing is performed.

  In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) has been detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311).

  When the winning of the upper start opening 34 is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of the operation holding balls (hereinafter referred to as “special drawing 1 operation holding balls”) according to the special symbol 1 is less than the maximum holding memory number (here, the upper limit of four). If no winning is detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311: NO), the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited without doing anything.

  If the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is 4 or more (step S312: YES), the process proceeds to step S325 described later. If the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is not 4 or more, that is, less than 4 (step (S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number (step S313), and the process proceeds to step S314.

  When the process proceeds to step S314, various random numbers used for the special symbol variation display game 1 relating to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the variation pattern random number 1, and the variation pattern random number 2 are acquired from the random number counter, and the acquired random number values are stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. To do. The reserved storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation holding ball (holding data). Here, as the operation holding ball, the above-described various random numbers are used for the special symbol 1. Until the variable display operation is performed (until the execution of the special symbol variable display game 1), it is held and stored in the order in which the start conditions are established (the winning order). The reserved memory area includes a reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (a special symbol 1 reserved memory area which is a first reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol 1), and a special symbol 2 Is provided as a second reserved storage area corresponding to FIG. 2). These reserved storage areas are provided with a reserved 1 storage area to a reserved n storage area (n is the maximum number of activated balls to be held: n = 4 in the present embodiment). (Holding storage order is stored in the order of holding 1 storage area, holding 2 storage area,..., Holding n−1 storage area, holding n storage area).

  Of the various random numbers, the special symbol determination random number, the variation pattern random number 1, and the variation pattern random number 2 are extracted from a random number counter that generates a random number in software corresponding to each. Since the random number values of these random number counters are updated randomly in the main process executed between the interrupt process and the interrupt process that occur intermittently in the count value storage areas corresponding to each provided in the RAM 203, The value is obtained as it is.

  On the other hand, the jackpot determination random number value is extracted from a random number generation circuit that generates a random number by hardware (a jackpot determination random number counter for counting the jackpot determination random value: not shown). This random number generation circuit latches the count value at this timing when a game ball detection signal is input from the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 34a, and the count value is input to the microcomputer. It has become. This count value is stored as a jackpot determination random number value in a storage area for special jackpot determination random values in RAM 203 (a special electric accessory activation determination random number latch buffer) provided separately from the reserved storage area of RAM 203, The CPU 201 reads out and uses the jackpot determination random number value stored in the special electric accessory activation determination random number latch buffer at a necessary timing. In this embodiment, the jackpot determination random number value at the time of winning is stored in the special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer and the reserved storage area. If not provided, it may be stored in the reserved storage area as it is, and the jackpot determination random number value in the corresponding reserved storage area may be read at a necessary timing.

  Next, pre-read prohibition data (EVENT: “01H” for prohibiting the pre-read determination as winning command data (data corresponding to the lower byte (EVENT) of the hold addition command) for creating a pending addition command (details will be described later) ”) Is acquired (step S315), and it is determined whether the“ special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition ”is satisfied (step S316). The “special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 1 operation holding ball.

  When the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the prefetch determination for the current special figure 1 operation holding ball is not executed, and thereby the prefetch notice effect is not executed. (See step S316: YES processing route). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side is prohibited when the game state is accompanied by the “electric support state”, that is, when the internal game state is in the probabilistic state. As described above, the reason for prohibiting the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side when the game state is accompanied by the electric support state is as follows.

  The first reason is that when the player is placed under a “power support state” such as “probability change state”, the “high base game” in which the winning rate for the lower start opening 35 can be significantly improved as compared with the normal game state. State (in this embodiment, the win rate of the movable wing piece 47 is improved: in this embodiment, the winning probability per assist is 255/256). Therefore, the player sets the launch position on the normal symbol start port 37 side. When aiming (when aiming so that the game ball passes through the right-down flow path 3c), the number of the operation reservation balls according to the special symbol 2 (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 operation reservation ball") is frequently Presumed to occur. On the other hand, when placed in a state without electrical support, the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 is low “low base gaming state (in this embodiment, the winning probability per assist is 1/256)” Further, due to the fall direction changing member such as a game nail, it is difficult for the game ball to be guided to the upper start opening 34 side, or it is configured not to be guided. When aiming at the launch position, it is a game that brings disadvantages. For this reason, it is presumed that the player does not set the launch position so that the game ball passes through the left flow path 3b side during the electric support state, and the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 1 operation holding ball This is because if the pre-reading determination is performed one by one for the special FIG. 1 operation holding ball having a low occurrence rate, there is a problem that the control burden increases.

  Also, as a second reason, in order to improve the fun of the game, when the look-ahead notice effect is varied, for example, a look-ahead notice effect related to the jackpot type (particularly, a look-ahead notice effect that can identify the selected jackpot type) This is because the following problem arises when it is possible to generate the error. In the present embodiment, when both the special figure 1 operation reservation ball and the special figure 2 operation reservation ball exist, the special figure 2 operation reservation ball is preferentially digested. Means) ”(see FIG. 15 showing details of a special symbol variation start process in step S306 described later). With this priority variation function, the special symbol variation display game 2 is executed more preferentially than the special symbol variation display game 1. For this reason, when placed in a state where there is an electric support, for example, only a pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 1 operation holding ball currently occurs, If the player recognizes this, the lower start port 35 is intentionally stopped from launching the game ball. The special symbol variation display game 1 on the non-priority variation side is deliberately executed, so that it is possible to deliberately aim at the high profit jackpot, and from the viewpoint of technical intervention problem It is not preferable.

  In addition, as an example of the problem of technical intervention, there is currently only a pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 1 action holding ball, and the content at this time is “relatively low profit among big hits” If the player is aware of the winning of a big hit (for example, 2R short-opening latent big hit), if the player recognizes this, a special figure on the priority fluctuation side will be provided so as not to interrupt the special figure 2 operation holding ball. By continuously executing the symbol variation display game 2, the game can be advanced while receiving the maximum benefit of the big win lottery on the special symbol 2 side (special symbol variation display game 2 side). Specifically, the special symbol 2 side of the big hit lottery excludes low profit 2 "short open latent big hit" and "small hit" among the big hit types, and high profit "10R long open positive change big hit" Or “15R long open probability change big hit” is a lottery target. For this reason, it is more advantageous for the player to receive the big win lottery on the special symbol 2 side (special symbol fluctuation display game 2 side) than to receive the big hit lottery on the special symbol 1 side (special symbol fluctuation display game 1 side). It is said to be expanded. Use this to maximize the benefits of the jackpot lottery on the special symbol 2 side until the end of the power support state (until the end of the specified number of STs), if the jackpot probability of the special figure 1 action holding ball is known After receiving, the problem of technical intervention, such as digesting the special figure 1 action holding ball related to the winning and easily obtaining a big hit, will cause inequality among players.

  In the present embodiment, in view of the above-described problems, a section (prefetch prohibition state) in which prefetch determination on the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side is prohibited is configured to be switchable according to the gaming state. . . Specifically, the main control unit 20 prohibits the prefetch determination by the first prefetch determination means (for example, the prefetch determination processing on the special figure 1 side: S317 to S323 in FIG. For example, a prefetch determination process on the special figure 2 side: S337 to S343 in FIG. 11 (to be described later) that permits a prefetch determination (for example, in a state where there is an electric support: in the “probable change state”) And the second prefetch prohibition state in which the prefetch determination by the second prefetch determination means is prohibited and the prefetch determination by the first prefetch determination means is allowed (for example, in the state without electric support: “Normal A” ”To“ Normal C ”), and a function unit as prefetch prohibition state control means for switching control based on a predetermined switching condition. The prefetching prohibition state control means switches to a third prefetching prohibition state in which prefetching judgment by the first prefetching judgment means and the second prefetching judgment means is completely prohibited based on a predetermined condition. Prohibiting means can be provided. Examples of the “predetermined condition” include a case where a big hit game or a small hit game is being played. This is because, during a winning game, the special symbol change display operation is not performed even if the operation holding ball is generated, and therefore it is not necessary to perform the pre-reading notice effect. Also, there are cases where the big hit lottery probability fluctuates before and after the hit game due to the big hit (excluding the small hit) (in the big hit game of this embodiment, regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit win, it temporarily shifts to the low probability state. (See S475 in FIG. 21A described later). In this case, an operation holding ball is generated during a big hit game, and if a prefetch determination is made for this, a win determination is made in a low probability state at the time of prefetch determination, and a win determination is made in a high probability state at the start of fluctuation. This is because a situation occurs and the processing related to the prefetch determination becomes complicated. However, as in this embodiment, if a big win is won, a gaming machine that always shifts to a high probability state after the big hit game ends will make a win determination assuming a high probability state in the prefetch determination, and the big hit game You may comprise so that pre-reading determination can be performed for the operation hold ball generated inside.

  Returning to the description of step S316 again, if the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the processing related to the prefetch determination (steps S317 to S324) is not performed, and the processing proceeds to step S325. .

  When the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), the process proceeds to step S317, and a random number determination table for special figure 1 (see FIG. 40) is acquired (step S317). The random number for jackpot determination stored in (the special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer) is acquired (step S318), and the random number determination process of step S319 is performed. In this random number determination process, the “winning lottery” relating to the special symbol variation display game (here, the special symbol variation display game 1) is determined in advance. Details of the random number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After completing the random number determination process in step S319, the special symbol 1 symbol table selection table (see FIG. 41) is acquired (step S320), and the special symbol determination random number value stored in the RAM 203 is acquired (step S320). S321), the special stop symbol data creation process of step S322 is performed. In this special stop symbol data creation process, the “symbol lottery” relating to the special symbol variation display game (here, the special symbol variation display game 1) is determined in advance. Details of the special stop symbol data creation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the special stop symbol data creation process in step S322 is completed, the start opening winning random number determination process in step S323 is then performed. In this starting point winning random number determination process, based on the data (special symbol determination data and variation pattern selection offset) obtained in the stop symbol data generation process of step S322, a prize used for generating a hold addition command to be described later. Command data (second byte: lower byte (EVENT)) is created. Details of the start opening winning random number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the random number determination process at the start opening winning in step S323 is completed, the winning command data on the upper byte (MODE) side that specifies the number of balls to be held at the time of the prefetch determination, and the lower byte (EVENT) side that specifies the prefetch variation pattern A “hold addition command” composed of the winning command data is created (steps S324 to S325), and is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 without being stored in the RAM 203 (step S326). Details of the “hold addition command” will be described later with reference to FIG. As a result, the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited, and then the special figure 2 start opening check process in step S302 of FIG. 11 is performed.

(8-2. Special Figure 2 Starting Port Check Processing: FIG. 11)
Next, the special figure 2 starting port check process (step S302 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 2 starting port check process.

  The special figure 2 starting port check process, like the special figure 1 starting port check process, serves as a winning process executed based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition. Here, the special symbol variation display game 2 In the same way as the flow of the special figure 1 start port check process described above, as the pre-start process for executing the process, the addition process of the number of suspended balls for operation, the process of storing various random numbers, the process of creating a pending addition command, etc. Processing is performed. Hereinafter, the same processing content as the above-described special figure 1 start opening check processing (step S301) will be described by omitting as appropriate in order to avoid duplication.

  In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the lower start opening 35 (step S331).

  If no winning detection is detected at the lower start opening 35 (step S331: NO), the special figure 2 start opening check process is exited without doing anything. On the other hand, when the winning of the lower start opening 35 is detected (step S331: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of the operation reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is 4 or more (step S332).

  When the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is 4 or more (step S332: YES), the process proceeds to step S345. On the other hand, when the number of special figure 2 operation reservation balls is not 4 or more, that is, when it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), the special figure 2 operation reservation balls number is incremented by 1 (+1) (step S333). Proceed to processing.

  Proceeding to the process of step S334, various random numbers (random hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, variation pattern random number 1, The current value of the random number counter 2) for the variation pattern is acquired and stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 (step S334). This process is the same as the process in step S314 of FIG. The special figure 2 operation hold ball is stored in the order in which the start conditions are satisfied, with the maximum hold storage number as a predetermined upper limit value, until it is used for the variable display operation of the special symbol 2.

  Next, prefetch prohibition data (lower byte “01H”) prohibiting prefetch determination is acquired as winning command data (step S335), and it is determined whether or not the “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is satisfied (step S335). S336). The “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 2 operation holding ball.

  When the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S336: YES), the prefetch determination for the current special figure 2 operation holding ball is not executed, and thereby the prefetch notice effect is not executed. (Step S336: YES processing route). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, when the game state is accompanied by a “game state with no electric support” state, that is, when the internal game state is in the normal game state or in the latent state, the special symbol 2 side is read ahead. Judgment is prohibited. Thus, the reason for prohibiting the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 2 side when the game state is accompanied by the state without the electric support is as follows.

  If it is in the “normal game state” or “latent state”, it is placed under the “no electric support” state, and the winning rate of the lower start opening 35 is significantly reduced. In addition, as described above, when the player aims at the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side in the absence of the electric support, the player is aiming so that the game ball passes through the left flow path 3b. However, it is a game that brings a disadvantage to the player that the winning rate of the upper start opening 34 is remarkably lowered. For this reason, it is presumed that the player does not aim the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side during the state without the electric support. Therefore, in the absence of the electric support, it is not necessary to generate the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 2 operation holding ball, and the prefetch determination is performed one by one for the special figure 2 operation holding ball having a low occurrence rate. This is because there arises a problem that the control burden increases.

  In the present embodiment, the pre-reading prohibited section on the special symbol 1 side (prefetching prohibited state period) and the pre-reading prohibited section on the special symbol 2 side can be switched according to the gaming state. Is not limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which no prefetch determination is performed on either the special symbol 1 side or the special symbol 2 side.

  Returning to the description of step S336 again, when the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S336: YES), the process proceeds to step S345. However, if the special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S336: NO), the process proceeds to step S337, and a special random number determination table for special figure 2 (see FIG. 40) is acquired (step S337). The jackpot determination random number value stored in the RAM 203 (special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer) is acquired (step S338), and a random number determination process is performed (step S339). In this random number determination process, a “winning lottery” relating to the special symbol variation display game 2 is performed. Further, the basic processing method is the same as the random number determination processing in step S319 during the special figure 1 starting port check processing of FIG.

  When the random number determination process in step S339 is completed, a special symbol 2 symbol table selection table (see FIG. 41) is acquired (step S340), and a special symbol determination random number value stored in the RAM 203 is acquired (step S340). S341), special stop symbol data creation processing is performed (step S342). In this special stop symbol data creation process, “symbol lottery” related to the special symbol variation display game 2 is performed. Further, the basic processing method is the same as the special stop symbol data creation process of step S322 during the special figure 1 start port check process of FIG.

  When the special stop symbol data creation process in step S342 is completed, a start port winning random number determination process similar to that in the special figure 1 start port check process is then performed (step S343), and based on the winning command data and the number of pending action balls Then, a hold addition command is created (steps S344 to S345), the created hold addition command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S346), and the special figure 2 start port check process is exited.

(8-1-1. Random number determination process (winning winning determination process): FIG. 12)
Next, the random number determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10 and step S339 in FIG. 11) will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the random number determination process. This random number determination processing is performed as part of the 'prefetching determination' processing, and here, "winning lottery (pre-winning (prefetching) winning determination)" related to prefetching determination using a random number for jackpot determination is performed. Is called.

  In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first refers to the acquired hit random number determination table (FIG. 40), compares the big hit determination random number value with the determination value indicated in the hit random number determination table, It is determined whether or not it belongs to the determination value (step S351), and a big hit determination flag and a small hit determination flag corresponding to the current gaming state are acquired (step S352). Note that the hit random number determination table referred to here is the hit random number determination table for special figure 1 of FIG. 11 is a random number determination table for special figure 2 shown in FIG. 40 (b) acquired in the process of step S337 during the special figure 2 starting port check process of FIG.

(T-1. Per random number determination table: FIG. 40)
The hit random number determination table will be described. FIG. 40 shows a hit random number determination table. 40A is a diagram illustrating a special random number determination table for special figure 1, and FIG. 40B is a diagram illustrating a special random number determination table for special figure 2. FIG.

  In the hit random number determination table of the present embodiment, the big hit lottery probability state (high probability state (high probability), low probability state (low probability)) and the big hit determination random number value (size of the big hit determination random number: 65536) And a determination area (determination value) for determining a hit type (a big hit, a small win or a loss) is determined in association with each other. Whether it is a big hit, a small hit or a loss is determined depending on whether or not it belongs to. Therefore, even when the acquired jackpot determination random number values belong to the same determination value (the same value for the jackpot determination random number value), the current jackpot lottery probability state is a high probability state or a low probability state. Depending on how, the hit type may be different, such as “big hit” on the one hand and “lost” on the other.

(T-1-1. Random number determination table for special figure 1: FIG. 40 (A))
With reference to FIG. 40A, the random number determination table for special figure 1 will be described.

(About jackpot winning)
In the special random number determination table for special figure 1 of the present embodiment, regarding whether or not the big hit, if the random number for big hit determination belongs to the range of determination values 10001 to 10165, the big hit determination flag is set in both the low probability state and the high probability state. It is “5AH”, and it is “Hot Win”. On the other hand, if the jackpot determination random number value falls within the range of the determination values 10166 to 11650, the winner is determined according to the jackpot lottery probability state. Under the high probability state, the jackpot determination flag is “5AH”, which is “hit winner”. However, under the low probability state, the big hit determination flag is “00H” and “big hit is not won”. In addition, except for the determination value in which the big hit determination flag is “5AH”, “big hit is not won”. In addition, the jackpot winning probability of this embodiment is about 1/397 in the low probability state, about 10 times higher in the high probability state than the low probability state, and about 1 / 39.7 in which the winning probability is increased, and wins the big hit. It is like that.

(About winning small hits)
As for the success / failure of the small hit, when the random number for determining the big hit is in the range of the determination values 20001 to 20112, the small hit determination flag is “5AH” in both the low probability state and the high probability state, and “small winning” If it belongs to any other judgment value, it is “small winning not won”. In other words, the winning probability for the small hit is constant regardless of the big win lottery probability state, and in this respect, the personality is different from that of the above big hit whose fluctuation probability varies depending on the big win lottery probability state. In this embodiment, the winning probability for the small hit is about 1/585, which is lower than the winning probability for the big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set equal to or higher than the winning probability of winning a jackpot.

(About losing)
If the jackpot determination random number value belongs to a determination value with the jackpot determination flag being “00H” and the jackpot determination is “00H”, neither “big hit” nor “small hit” was won. This time, the winning judgment result is “lost”.

(T-1-2. Random number determination table for special figure 2: FIG. 40 (b))
Next, the random number determination table for special figure 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The special random number determination table for special figure 2 of this embodiment differs from the random number determination table for special figure 1 in the following points. In the special figure 1 hit random number determination table described above, when the big hit determination random number value is in the range of the determination values 20001 to 20112, the small hit determination flag is “5AH” in both the low probability state and the high probability state, Become. However, in this special figure 2 random number determination table, there is no determination value itself for winning a small hit. In other words, in the special symbol fluctuation display game 1, the big win, the small hit, and the loss are targeted for the winning lottery, whereas in the special symbol variation display game 2, only the big win and the lost are targeted for the winning lottery. Of course, in the random number determination table for special figure 2 as well, the small hit may be determined as a winning lottery object. It should be noted that the winning probability of the jackpot in the special figure 2 random number determination table is the same as the winning probability in the special figure 1 random number determination table.

  Here, in this embodiment, the state (5AH or 00H) of the big hit determination flag acquired in the processing of step S352 is loaded (loaded) into a general-purpose register (here, A register) built in the CPU, and the small hit determination flag is set. The state (“5AH” or “00H”) is taken into another general-purpose register (D register in this case), and the random number determination process is exited with the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag held in the register. In other words, the CPU 201 does not store the winning lottery results fetched into the A register and the D register in the RAM 203 but leaves the random number determination process while holding the results in the respective registers.

  In the present embodiment, the determination result obtained in the current winning determination process, that is, the data of the winning lottery result in the prefetch determination is immediately used in the subsequent special stop symbol data creating process, and this data is required thereafter. There is nothing. Therefore, there is no problem even if the determination result is left in the register without being stored in the RAM 203 and the random number determination process is exited. This eliminates the need for a program for storing the determination result of the winning determination process (the winning result related to the prefetch determination), and it is not necessary to provide a dedicated storage area for storing the determination result. The memory capacity of the ROM and RAM can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced. Although the details will be described later, the random number determination process (step S319, step S339 :: winning lottery process in winning process) will be described later as a special electronic article operation determination random number determination process (step S409 in FIG. 15 described later). In the winning lottery process related to the process at the start of change), it is used as a common processing module. However, for the data obtained in the random determination process for determining the special electric component operation described later, the data required later for determining the variation pattern at the start of variation in post-processing and for executing the jackpot game according to the jackpot type Therefore, the situation is different from the above-described random number determination process related to the prefetch determination process, and the data is stored in the RAM 203.

(8-1-2. Special stop symbol data creation process (special stop symbol data creation process when winning a prize): FIG. 13)
Next, the special stop symbol data creation process (step S322 in FIG. 10 and step S342 in FIG. 11) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of the special stop symbol data creation process. This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as part of the 'prefetch determination' process, similar to the above random number determination processing. Here, the symbol design lottery (prefetching related to the prefetch determination using the special symbol determination random number value is used. Symbol determination) ”is performed.

  In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first refers to the acquired symbol table selection table (FIG. 41), and the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination processing (step S319 in FIG. 10, step S339 in FIG. 11), that is, the register A The symbol table (FIGS. 42 to 44: details will be described later) corresponding to the state of the big hit determination flag and the state of the small hit determination flag held in D is acquired (step S361). It should be noted that the symbol table selection table referred to here is the symbol table selection table for special symbol 1 in FIG. 11 is the special figure 2 symbol table selection table of FIG. 41 (b) acquired in the process of step S340 during the special figure 2 starting port check process of FIG.

(T-2: Symbol table selection table: Fig. 41)
FIG. 41 shows a symbol table selection table. FIG. 41A is a diagram illustrating a special table symbol selection table for special figure 1, and FIG. 41B is a diagram illustrating a special symbol table selection table for special figure 2. FIG.

(T-2-1: Symbol table selection table for special figure 1: FIG. 41 (a))
With reference to FIG. 41 (a), the symbol table selection table for special figure 1 will be described. In the special figure 1 symbol table selection table of the present embodiment, a winning lottery result and a symbol table type (see FIGS. 42 to 44) to be described later are defined in association with each other. Based on the plurality of types of symbol tables, one symbol table is determined. According to the special figure 1 symbol table selection table, when the winning lottery result is a big hit, the “big hit symbol table 1 (FIG. 42 (A))” is selected, and when the winning lottery is a small hit, the “small hit symbol table (FIG. 42) is selected. "Is lost," Lose symbol table 1 (Fig. 43 (B)) "is determined. Details of these symbol tables will be described later with reference to FIGS.

(T-2-2: Special table 2 symbol table selection table: FIG. 41 (b))
Next, the special symbol 2 symbol table selection table will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 2 symbol table selection table, one symbol table is selected from among a plurality of types of symbol tables based on the winning lottery result, in the same manner as the configuration of the special symbol 1 symbol table selection table. It has become so. However, in the special symbol 2 per symbol table selection table, when the winning lottery result is a big hit, the “big hit symbol table 2 (FIG. 42 (B))” is displayed. 43 (b)) ”is determined, and the“ small hit symbol table (FIG. 42) ”for the small hit is not included. This is because, on the special symbol fluctuation display game 2 side (special symbol 2 side), “small hit” is excluded from the winning lottery object, and no small win is won (see FIG. ) “Big hit symbol table 2”.

  If the processing of the above step S361 is specifically described, when the symbol table selection table for special figure 1 is referred to, the winning lottery result (the state of the big hit determination flag and the state of the small hit determination flag) is “big hit ( If the big hit determination flag = 5 AH, the small hit determination flag = 00H) ”, the“ big hit symbol table 1 ”is the“ small hit (big hit determination flag = 00H, small hit determination flag = 5AH) ”. When the “small hit symbol table” is “losing (big hit determination flag = 00H, small hit determination flag = 00H)”, the “lost symbol table 1” is acquired. Further, when the special table 2 symbol table selection table is referred to, when “big hit (big hit determination flag = 5 AH, small hit determination flag = 00H”), “big hit symbol table 2” is “lost: big hit When “determination flag = 00H, small hit determination flag = 00H”, “losing symbol table 2” is acquired.

  Next, the special symbol determination data, the special stop symbol number, and the variation pattern selection offset value are acquired with reference to the symbol table acquired in the process of step S361 (step S362).

(T-3 to T-5. Symbol table: FIGS. 42 to 44)
Each symbol table will be described. FIG. 42 shows the big hit symbol table, FIG. 43 shows the small hit symbol table, and FIG. 44 shows the lost symbol table.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 to 44, various symbol tables of the present embodiment include “special symbol determination random value (special symbol determination random value: 200)”, “special symbol determination data, A special stop symbol number and a determination area (determination value) for determining “variation pattern selection offset” are determined in association with each other. Specifically, the special symbol determination random number value belongs to any determination value. Depending on whether or not, the jackpot type, special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset are determined.

  The “special symbol determination data” is data for identifying the hit type. Specifically, in the case of a big hit (when the big hit determination flag = 5 AH, the small hit determination flag = 00H), the special symbol determination data is “01H” indicates “2R short open latent large hit”, “02H” indicates “10R long open positive change big hit”, and “03H” indicates “15R long open positive change big hit”. In the case of small hit (when big hit determination flag = 00H, small hit determination flag = 5 AH), when the special symbol determination data is “01H”, “small hit A”, and when “02H”, “small” A hit B 'or "03H" indicates a' small hit C '. In the case of a loss (when the big hit determination flag = 00H, the small hit determination flag = 00H), when the special symbol determination data is “00H”, it indicates that the loss is “A to C”. This special symbol determination data is used in processing related to gaming state transition control (for example, gaming state transition preparation processing in step S411 in FIG. 15 described later) and processing related to jackpot gaming (for example, special electric accessory processing (step S60)). Data used.

  The “special stop symbol number” is data for designating a special stop symbol type to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, and is used when specifying the stop symbol type of the special symbol on the main control unit 20 side. The In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, a special stop symbol number corresponding to each determination value is selected. For example, even in the case of the same 2R short-open latency probability hit, The display mode of the special stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b (in this embodiment, the display mode of “7-segment”) may be different. The same applies to the small hit symbol table and the lost symbol table described later. In this way, even if the winning type is the same, even if the special stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display device is determined by defining a plurality of types of special stop symbol numbers according to the special symbol determination random number value, It is difficult to tell what kind of big hits, small hits or loses a player has won. As in this embodiment, if the behavior during the 2R latent big hit game is substantially the same as that during the small hit game, not only the mechanical operation and production of the big prize opening, but also a special To make it difficult for the player to understand the winning type from the special stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device, in order to raise the expectation of rushing into a high probability state, that is, to win the winning expectation of 2R short-open latency big hit It is valid.

  The above “variation pattern selection offset (indicated as“ offset value ”in the drawing)” is offset data used when selecting a later-described pending addition command or variation pattern designation command.

(T-3. Big hit symbol table: FIG. 42)
The jackpot symbol table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42A is a diagram illustrating a jackpot symbol table 1 (a jackpot symbol table for special figure 1), and FIG. 42B is a diagram illustrating a jackpot symbol table 2 (a jackpot symbol table for special figure 2).

(T-3-1: jackpot symbol table 1: FIG. 42 (A))
In the jackpot symbol table 1 of the present embodiment, a special symbol determination random number value and a determination value for determining the jackpot type are mainly associated with each other. Specifically, the special symbol determination random number value is determined. One of the big hits is determined from a plurality of types of big hits depending on which judgment value belongs to. Referring to the “judgment value” column of the jackpot symbol table 1 shown in the figure, if the random number for special symbol determination falls within the range of determination values 0 to 119, the “2R short open latent probability big hit” is won (symbol selection) Rate (symbol lottery probability): 120/200), if it falls within the range of judgment values 120 to 179, “10R long open probability change big hit” wins (symbol selection rate: 60/200), range of judgment values 180 to 199 If it belongs to the category, it will be a “15R long open probability variable big hit” win (symbol selection rate: 20/200), and any one of the big hits will be determined with a predetermined symbol selection rate. . In the same manner, the small hit symbol table (FIG. 43), which will be described later, similarly determines the small hit type (small hits A to C) with a predetermined symbol selection rate. Similarly in FIG. 44), the loss type (loss A to C) is determined at a predetermined symbol selection rate.

(T-3-2: jackpot symbol table 2: FIG. 42 (b))
The jackpot symbol table 2 of this embodiment has the same basic configuration as the jackpot symbol table 1 described above, but differs from the jackpot symbol table 1 in the following points. The jackpot symbol table 2 is different from the jackpot symbol table 1 in a specific jackpot symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability). Specifically, when it falls within the range of the judgment value 0 to 79, it becomes the “10R long open probability variation big hit” winning (symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability): 80/200) and belongs to the range of the judgment value 80 to 199. In this case, “15R long open probability change big hit” is won (symbol selection rate: 120/200), and “2R short open latent big hit” is a winning configuration. The symbol lottery based on the jackpot symbol table 1 is more likely to be selected than the symbol lottery, which is a symbol lottery advantageous to the player. That is, the game development is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery of the special symbol variation display game 2 than the special symbol variation display game 1.

(T-4: Small hits symbol table: FIG. 43)
Next, the small hit symbol table will be described with reference to FIG. As in the configuration of the big hit symbol table described above, the small hit symbol table of the present embodiment depends on whether the special symbol determination random number value belongs to one of the determination areas (determination values) or not. Any one of hits A to C), special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset are determined.

(T-5: Lost symbol table: Fig. 44)
Next, the lost symbol table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 (a) shows an example of a lost symbol table 1 (a lost symbol table for special figure 1), and FIG. 44 (b) shows an example of a lost symbol table 2 (a lost symbol table for special figure 2).

  In each of the lost symbol tables 1 and 2 of the present embodiment, whether or not the special symbol determination random number value belongs to any one of the determination areas (determination values), as in the configuration of the big hit symbol table or the small hit table. Thus, the loss type (any of the loss A to C), the special symbol determination data, the special stop symbol number, and the variation pattern selection offset are determined. As shown in the figure, the lost symbol table 1 and the lost symbol table 2 have different determination values related to the winning of the lost A to C. Accordingly, even if the special symbol determination random number is the same value, the case where the loss symbol table 1 is referred to and the case where the loss symbol table 2 is referred to may be different in the type of loss that is won.

  In the process of step S362, regarding the various data obtained from the symbol table described above ((the symbol lottery result in the pre-reading determination: special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset), the special symbol determination data Is stored in the A register, the special stop symbol number is stored in the B register, and the variation pattern selection offset is stored in the C register.In this state, the special stop symbol data creation process is exited, and the start opening winning random number determination process is performed. The process proceeds to step S323 if the special chart 1 start opening check process in Fig. 10 is in progress, and proceeds to step 343 if the special figure 2 start opening check process in Fig. 11 is in progress. , And the data fetched in the C register without storing them in the RAM 203 While holding to, exit the special stop symbol data creation process.

  Various data of the judgment results (design lottery results in the pre-reading judgment) obtained in this special stop symbol data creation process are immediately used in the subsequent random determination process at the time of starting opening winning, and then this data is required There is no. Therefore, there is no problem even if the special stop symbol data creation process is exited while the determination result is not stored in the RAM 203 but is held in the register. This eliminates the need for a program for storing the determination result of the special stop symbol data creation process and eliminates the need for a separate storage area for storing the determination result, thus reducing the memory capacity. , Control burden can be reduced. Although the details will be described later, the special stop symbol data creation process (step S322 in FIG. 10, step S342 in FIG. 11: symbol lottery process in the winning process) is a stop symbol creation process (step in FIG. 15 to be described later). In S410: symbol lottery process of the fluctuation start process), it is used as a common processing module. However, since the data obtained in the stop symbol creation process described later is data necessary for determining the variation pattern at the start of variation in post-processing and executing the jackpot game according to the jackpot type, pre-reading determination The situation is different from the above-described special stop symbol data creation process related to the process, and the data is stored in the RAM 203.

(8-1-3. Random number determination process at start-up winning prize: FIG. 14)
Next, the start opening winning random number determination process (step S323 in FIG. 10, step S343 in FIG. 11) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the start opening winning random number determination process. The start opening winning random number determination process is performed as part of the pre-read determination process, as in the random number determination process (steps S319 and S339) and the special stop symbol data creation process (steps S322 and S342). Then, a process of creating winning command data (second byte (EVENT): lower byte) used for creating a “hold addition command” to be described later is performed. A look-ahead variation pattern (excluding reserved ball number information) is designated by the winning command data (EVENT) determined in the starting opening winning random number determination process.

  This starting port winning random number determination process includes the following processes (a) and (b) as processes for determining the winning command data (EVENT) for designating the pre-reading variation pattern.

(A) Winning command distribution table and variation pattern distribution table combined selection table (hereinafter referred to as “winning variation start distribution combined table selection table” (see FIG. 46)), variation pattern selection offset value And a variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) according to the winning pattern change start allocation shared table (variation pattern table first layer (see FIGS. 47 and 48)). Table determination process (steps S371 to S373) ",
(B) “Winning command data determination process (steps S373 to S374)” for determining winning command data (low-order byte side (EVENT) of the pending addition command) based on the above-mentioned combined use table at the time of start of variation at winning. Consists of including.

  Here, the “variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)” functions as a “variation pattern selection mode” and is data for identifying the current gaming state. Referring to the variation pattern allocation designation number table of FIG. 57, when the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is “00H”, it indicates “normal A”, and when it is “01H”, “normal B”. "02H" indicates "normal C", and "03H" indicates "probability change state (probability change)". This variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is changed when there is a change in the gaming state. Therefore, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is different from data identifying the internal gaming state itself, such as a gaming state determination number (YJ) described later, in that it identifies the gaming state as described above. Hereinafter, the processing methods (a) and (b) will be specifically described.

(A) Winning variation start / distribution allocation table determination process (steps S371 to S373)
In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first corrects the “variation pattern selection offset value” obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process (steps S322 and S342) (step S371: offset correction process for winning variation pattern selection). . Here, the special stop symbol data creation processing is used as data for selecting the winning change / distribution start distribution table (FIGS. 47 and 48) from the winning change / distribution distribution selection table (FIG. 46). Predetermined correction processing is performed on the variation pattern selection offset value obtained in the above, and processing for acquiring a new variation pattern selection offset value is performed. The details of the above-described “variation start / distribution table selection table for winning change and“ variation start / variation allocation table for winning change ”will be described later.

  Referring to FIG. 45, the winning correction pattern selecting offset correction processing in step S371 will be described. FIG. 45 is a diagram for explaining the offset correction process for winning variation pattern selection. FIG. 45 (a) shows the variation pattern selection offset value (hereinafter referred to as "winning time" obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process). (Hereinafter referred to as “offset value before correction”) and a list of the contents thereof, and FIG. A list is shown.

  In FIG. 45 (a), for example, when the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning is “00H”, the winning lottery and symbol lottery for the special figure 1 operation holding ball (indicated as “special figure 1” in the figure) The prefetch determination result based on this indicates “losing A”. Also, when the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning is “04H”, the pre-read determination result based on the winning lottery and the symbol lottery for the special figure 2 operation holding ball (indicated as “special figure 2” in the figure) is “losing A” In addition, the variable pattern selection offset value obtained by the special stop symbol data creation process and its contents are shown (see the column of “offset value” in the symbol table shown in FIGS. 42 to 44). In the figure, “Special Figure 1” indicates the special figure 1 operation holding ball side, and “Special Figure 2” indicates the special figure 2 operation holding ball side.

  Note that the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning shown in FIG. 45 (a) is a partially skipped value for the following reason.

  If the variation of the pre-reading notice effect is to be abundant, not only the big hit lottery result but also the random number for the variation pattern is used because the rough content of the variation pattern at the start of the variation is specified by the prefetch variation pattern. It is necessary to determine the look-ahead variation pattern, and a simple control process that is common to both is desired. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, in order to reduce the control burden, the random determination process (steps S319 and S339) at the time of winning a prize is changed to the random determination process for determining the operation of a special electric instrument at the start of fluctuation ( It is used as a common processing module in step S409 of FIG. 15 described later, and special stop symbol data creation processing (steps S322 and S342) in winning process is special stop symbol creation processing in variation start process (described later). 15 in step S410) as a common processing module. For this reason, the variation pattern selection offset obtained in the “winning process” (offset value before the correction process in step S371) and the variation pattern selection offset value obtained in the “variation start process” (step S441 described later). (Offset value before correction processing) takes the same value and has the same designated content (see the table before correction processing in FIG. 45 (a) and FIG. 52 (a) described later).

  In addition, when there are many variations of effects during the symbol variation display game, it is necessary to increase the types of variation patterns of special symbols, so the variation pattern selection offset value used in the variation start processing is Although the content is based on the number of activated balls (refer to a table after correction processing in FIG. 52 (B) described later), the number of activated balls is not taken into account at the time of prefetch determination. This is because the number of the operation suspending balls at the time of the prefetch determination does not necessarily match the number of the operation suspending at the start of the variation, and therefore, the content of the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation cannot be prefetched. For this reason, the variation pattern selection offset before the correction process at the time of winning or at the start of variation creates a vacant number that takes into account the number of suspended balls (partially skipped) The offset values 01H to 03H (special figure 1 side) and 05H to 07H (special figure 2 side) corresponding to the number of balls are used as empty numbers).

(T-6. Distribution table selection table for use at the time of winning change at the time of winning: FIG. 46)
Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, the “variation start selection sharing table selection table at the time of winning change” will be described before entering the description of the correction processing in step S371.

  FIG. 46 shows a shared allocation table selection table at the time of winning variation start. In the winning variation sharing allocation table selection table of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning variation variation allocation associated with a variation pattern selection offset value and a variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) are included. A table has been established. Specifically, based on the variation pattern selection offset value and the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), any one of the multiple types of variation start time allocation distribution tables (H1 to H12, A1 to A6) is selected. A single allocation table at the start of fluctuation when winning is determined.

  In the above-mentioned winning / variation start / allocation allocation table selection table, the address value of the winning / variation start / allocation allocation table corresponding to the offset value for variation pattern selection and the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is stored. In order to reduce the memory capacity and simplify the program, the data structure uses continuous addresses so as to correspond to the offset value for selecting the variation pattern. To select the distribution table at the start of variation at the time of winning, first select the distribution table selection table at the start of variation at the time of winning corresponding to the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and according to the offset value for variation pattern selection Select the distribution table at the start of fluctuation when winning. That is, the winning address variation start / shared allocation table selection table selected for each variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) describes the start address value that defines the winning variation / distributed distribution table. The address value is subjected to addition processing to be added to the variation pattern selection offset value (here, the offset value obtained in the correction processing in step S371 described later) to obtain the relative address with respect to the head address. By specifying the address value of the winning start variation sharing table, the winning change starting distribution table can be selected. For example, when the head address is 1000 and the variation pattern selection offset value is 01H, the variation pattern selection offset value “01H” is added to the head address, and the combined use at the time of winning variation at the time of winning 1001 is combined. Get minute table.

  Further, the above-mentioned distribution table selection table at the start of variation at the time of winning is not only used when determining a winning command (EVENT) at the time of pre-reading determination, but also processing related to determination of a “variation pattern designation command” at the start of variation. (Refer to FIG. 19 showing the details of the special symbol variation pattern creation process of FIG. 15 described later).

  The above “variation start / allocation sorting table selection table” is provided as a table for prefetch determination / variation start, but as described above, the number of suspended balls at the time of prefetch determination Therefore, the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation cannot be determined in advance. Accordingly, in step S371, the offset value before the correction at the time of winning is subjected to the following correction process to change the offset value to ignore the operation-reserved ball, and the winning change is determined from the combined allocation table selection table at the time of starting the winning change. This simplifies the processing when selecting the time variation start / distribution allocation table, and reduces the control burden.

  Specifically, in the correction process of step S371, when the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning is “04H”, that is, when the prefetch determination result is “Loss A in FIG. When it is corrected to “00H” so as to have the same offset value as “losing A” and the offset value before winning correction exceeds “07H” (when the offset value before winning winning correction value> 07H), The pre-correction offset value at the time of winning is not subjected to any correction processing. Accordingly, the offset value after correction at the time of winning is from “01H” to “07H”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and since the above-mentioned distribution table selection table for the variation start at the time of winning is provided as a table for both the pre-reading determination and the variation start, any correction processing is performed on the offset value before correction at the time of winning. It is also possible to configure so that the distribution table at the time of winning change combination selection table is selected from the above-mentioned distribution table selection table at the time of winning change.

  A new variation pattern selection offset value (offset value after winning prize correction) obtained by the above correction process and its contents are as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, this offset value is used to select a desired winning / variation start / distribution distribution table from the winning / variation start / distribution distribution table selection table (steps S372 to S373). ).

  When the correction process in step S371 is completed, a winning variation / distribution allocation table selection table is acquired (step S372), and the variation pattern selection corrected with reference to the winning variation start / distribution table selection table is obtained. The distribution table at the time of winning change is obtained according to the offset value and the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) (step S373). As a result, any one of a winning combination change table “A1 to A6” and a lost winning change combination distribution table “H1 to H12” described later is determined. However, in the offset value after correction at the time of winning, “01H” to “07H” are vacant numbers, and therefore the winning-time variation start and distribution distribution table corresponding to this is not selected.

(B) Winning command data determination process (steps S374 to S375)
The CPU 201 acquires the variation start time / distribution table selection table in the process of step S372, and then acquires the variation pattern random value 1 (step S374), and refers to the winning variation start / distribution distribution table. Then, “winning command data” corresponding to the random number 1 for the variation pattern is acquired (step S375).

(T-7. Distribution table at the time of winning start variation: FIG. 47, FIG. 48)
The above-mentioned distribution table for the start of fluctuation at the time of winning is described. FIG. 47 shows a distribution table at the time of the start and change at the time of winning prize selection selected at the time of winning, and FIG. 48 shows a distribution table at the time of start of the change at the time of change in winning prize selected at the time of losing.

  Referring to FIGS. 47 and 48, the “variation table at the time of change at winning start combined allocation table” determined by the “variation table at the time of winning change at the start of distribution” has a plurality of types that can be selected at the time of winning. A winning start variation sharing table “A1 to A6” and a plurality of types of lost winning variation start allocation distribution tables “H1 to H12” that can be selected during a loss are included. These allocation table for change start at the time of winning is provided as a table for both pre-reading determination and change start. Accordingly, the following data groups are defined in the winning start variation combined distribution table.

  (A) Referring to FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, in the above-mentioned distribution table for variation start at winning, the variation pattern random value 1 (the size of variation pattern random value 1: 239) and the winning command data ( EVENT) are defined in association with each other. This data is used in the start opening winning random number determination process (step S323 in FIG. 10 and step S343 in FIG. 11) related to the winning process. Specifically, the random number value 1 for the variation pattern is used in the prefetch determination. As a result of the lottery used, any one of the plurality of types of winning command data is determined (refer to the “Winning” column in FIGS. 47 and 48).

  (B) In addition, the data used in the process related to the determination of the “variation pattern designation command” related to the process at the time of the change start is also defined in the share table for change start at the time of winning (details of this process) Will be described later in the special symbol variation pattern creation processing of FIG. 15). Specifically, the random number value for variation pattern 1, the variation start command data 1, and the second layer of variation pattern distribution table (FIGS. 53 and 54 to be described later) are determined in the variation start / distribution distribution table upon winning. And a determination area (determination value) to be determined. This data is used in a special symbol variation pattern creation process (see FIG. 19 showing the details of the special symbol variation pattern creation process in FIG. 15) related to the variation start process described later. The variation start command data 1 and the variation pattern distribution table second hierarchy are determined depending on which decision value the variation pattern random value 1 belongs to (see FIGS. 47 and 48). (Refer to “Start of change” column). The “fluctuation pattern distribution table second layer” is a table used when determining the variation start command data 2 and the variation time of special symbols.

  Here, the “variation start command data 1” designates a “basic pattern” that is the gist (base) of the variation pattern (variation pattern at the start of variation) of the special symbol, Byte side (MODE) data. The “variation start command data 2” is for designating the “detail pattern” which is the specific content of the basic pattern, and is data on the lower byte side (EVENT) of the variation pattern designation command. . Therefore, the “variation pattern designation command” for designating the variation pattern at the start of variation is composed of 2-byte control data consisting of “variation start command data 1 (MODE)” and “variation start command data 2 (EVENT)”. Is done. When this change pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 side grasps the change pattern at the start of change (the change pattern of the special symbol).

  The “variation pattern random value 1” is a random number used when determining the prefetch variation pattern and the variation pattern at the start of variation. In the present embodiment, the same random number value for variation pattern 1 is used in the processing related to the prefetch determination and the processing related to determination of the variation pattern at the start of variation, It is possible to determine in advance in advance what type of variation pattern is determined as the variation pattern type at the start of variation to be determined.

  47 and 48, “first layer determination content” indicates “prefetch variation pattern content” specified by the winning command data (EVENT). In addition, the Arabic numerals in the figure indicate the distribution value (the size of the determination area) (the same notation in FIGS. 53 and 54 to be described later), for example, the column of the distribution table A2 that is used for the start of variation at the time of winning winnings shown in the figure , The winning command data “0EH” designating “weak SP reach A” is selected at a ratio of 50/239 (distribution value / lottery area size).

  Here, for convenience of explanation, “selection rate” is shown in the figure, but actually, a determination area (determination) for determining the winning command data (EVENT) according to the random number 1 for the variation pattern. Value). That is, depending on which decision value the variation pattern random value 1 belongs to, “winning command data (EVENT)” is obtained in the winning process, and “variation starting command data 1 (MODE) and“ The “variation pattern distribution table second hierarchy” is determined.

  The relationship between the distribution value and the determination value shown in the figure is as follows. For example, in the above-described winning process, the distribution value at the time of winning winning variation and distribution allocation table “A2” will be described as a representative example. Referring to the location, the distribution values are described in the order of “50”, “80”, “39”, “70”. If it belongs to the range (corresponding to the description column of the distribution value “50”), the command “0EH” designating “weak SP reach A” is selected, and the range of determination values 50 to 129 (the distribution value “80” “0FH” for designating “strong SP reach A” is selected and falls within the range of determination values 130 to 168 (corresponding to the description column for the distribution value “39”). If it belongs, the command “weak SP reach B” “0H” is selected, and if it belongs to the range of determination values 169 to 238 (corresponding to the description field of the distribution value “80” above), the command “11H” specifying “strong SP reach B” is selected (Refer to the column of “Winning” in FIG. 47). Similarly, for example, the distribution table “H5” at the start of fluctuation for winning a winning combination will be described in the order of “150” and “89”. If it belongs to the range of values 0 to 149 (corresponding to the description field of the distribution value “150”), the command “04H” designating “weak SP reach A” is selected, and the range of determination values 150 to 238 (above Belongs to the distribution value “89” column), it means that the command “05H” for designating “strong SP reach A” is selected (in the “winning” column in FIG. 48). reference). 53 and 54, which will be described later, have the same “selection rate” notation, but as described above, a determination value corresponding to the random number value 1 or 2 for the variation pattern is determined (this) Is omitted to avoid duplication).

(T-7-1. Distribution table at the time of start of fluctuation at the time of winning a prize (at the time of winning (at the time of pre-reading determination)): FIG. 47)
The winning winning-variation start / distribution distribution table shown in FIG. 47 includes the following as winning winning command data for designating a pre-reading variation pattern for winning. Command data for specifying “2R short open latency / small hit win 1” used in “Normal A” or “Normal B” to specify 2R short open latency big win or small win win Command data specified by “2R short open latency / small win winning 2” used in “normal C”, “2R short open latency / small hit winning 3” used in “probability change state” 3 Command data for specifying "." In addition, the 10R and 15R long-open probability variable big wins are designated as “Weak SP Reach A”, “Weak SP Reach B”, “Strong SP Reach A” and “Strong” used during “Normal A” or “Normal B”. Each command data designating “SP reach B”, command data designating “special reach” used in “normal C”, command data designating “reaching during probability change” used in “probability change state”, etc. Is included.

(T-7-2. Distributing table at the start of fluctuation for winning a winning game (at the time of winning (pre-reading judgment)): FIG. 48)
In addition, the above-described loss start winning change-and-use distribution table shown in FIG. 48 includes the following as lose win winning command data for designating a pre-reading change pattern at the time of a lose. “Low SP Reach A”, “Weak SP Reach B”, “Strong SP Reach A”, and “Strong SP Reach B” used in “Normal A” or “Normal B” to specify the fluctuation pattern with reach Each command data to be specified, command data specifying “special reach” used in “normal C”, winning command data specifying “reach during probability change” used in “probability change state”, and the like are included. In the case of “losing”, unlike the case of “winning”, the possibility of winning a big hit is zero, and therefore, there is a loss fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation pattern) indicating no reach. The command data specifying “normal fluctuation” used during “normal A”, “normal B”, or “normal C”, Command data specifying “normal fluctuation (2 s)” used in “status” is included.

  In the figure, the loss winning command data “03H” designating “indefinite (normal fluctuation / reach)” indicates whether the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is a normal fluctuation pattern or a fluctuation pattern with reach at the time of prefetch determination. This is command data that specifies that it is unknown. This is because the variation pattern is determined in consideration of the number of suspended balls in the variation pattern determination stage at the beginning of variation (the special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S412 of FIG. 19), at the time of the prefetch determination, the number of the operation suspension balls at the time of the prefetch determination does not necessarily coincide with the number of the operation suspension at the start of the variation, and therefore, it is not possible to make a prefetch determination of the variation pattern at the start of the exact variation . For this reason, in the pre-reading variation pattern determination stage, the variation pattern is determined without considering the number of suspended balls, and when the variation pattern random value 1 is “210 to 238”, the variation pattern is a normal variation pattern. This is because it is not possible to determine whether the pattern has a reach or a fluctuation pattern with reach. Specifically, in the case of a loss A at the start of the change, unlike the pre-reading determination, one of the above-mentioned variable start-time distribution tables H1 to H4 is selected according to the number of suspended balls at the start of the change. There is a possibility (refer to the column of offset values 00H to 03H in FIG. 46), and when H1 is selected, normal variation is 1 with the judgment value “0 to 209” and “N reach” with the judgment value “210 to 238”. Is selected, normal variation 1 is selected with the determination value “0 to 219”, “N reach” is selected with the determination value “220 to 238”, and determination value is selected when H3 is selected. When “0-229” is selected, the normal variation 2 is selected. When the determination value “230-238” is selected, “N reach” is selected. When H4 is selected, only the “normal variation 3” is selected with the determination value “0-238”. Because it is done. This problem occurs particularly in the case of Loss A, but the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation in the case of Loss A of the present embodiment is mainly “normal fluctuation” or “N reach” with a relatively low expectation of winning a big hit. Therefore, there is no particular problem even if the “normal fluctuation” is exceptionally determined without determining the above “indefinite (normal fluctuation / reach)”. In the present embodiment, if the determination value is “210 to 238”, the possibility of “N reach” increases. Therefore, at the time of the prefetch determination, “N reach” is used in the range of the determination value “210 to 238”. You may judge.

  Further, the effect control unit 24 executes the pre-reading notice effect with the lose prize command data “02H” designating “normal variation” and the lose prize command data “03H” designating “indefinite (normal variation / reach)”. If the probabilities (prefetching notice lottery winning probability) are the same, or if a predetermined prefetching notice effect is made to appear with the same probability on both sides, the contents of the prefetching notice effect and the notice effect in the symbol variation display game There is no contradiction to the content. However, in this case, the appearance rate and the content of the production of the same pre-reading preview performance pre-reading announcement are the same for both, and the variation of the production is limited. Therefore, the execution probability of the pre-reading notice effect is different between the lose prize command data “02H” designating “normal variation” and the lose prize command data “03H” designating “indefinite (normal variation / reach)”. It is preferable. For example, in the case of the lost winning command data “03H” for designating “indefinite (normal variation / reach)” so that the content of the pre-reading notice effect and the content of the notice effect during the symbol variation display game are not different from each other, Predictive notice effect with relatively low expectation of winning a big hit (for example, setting the probability that the hold icon changes to blue higher than the probability that it changes to other colors (yellow, green, red)) Is preferred.

  Returning to step S375 again. In the process of step S375, the winning command data (EVENT) obtained from the winning change / distribution distribution table is taken into the C register, and in this state, the start opening winning random number determination process can be exited. It has become. In other words, the CPU 201 does not store the winning command data (EVENT) fetched in the C register in the RAM 203, but leaves the starting opening winning random number determination process while holding it in the register.

  The determination result (winning command data) obtained by the starting port random number determining process at this time is immediately used in the process of creating the subsequent pending addition command, and this data is not required thereafter. Accordingly, there is no problem even if the determination result is left in the predetermined register without being stored in the RAM 203 and the random number determination process at the time of starting port winning is exited. This eliminates the need for a program for storing the determination result of the random number determination process at the start-up winning prize, and it is not necessary to provide a separate storage area for the RAM 203, thereby reducing the memory capacity and the control burden. Can do.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the “variation at the start of fluctuation at the time of winning combination” determined from the “distribution table at the start of fluctuation at time of winning combination” and the distribution table selection table at the time of change at the time of winning winning combination are selected. The “minute table” is used not only when determining a winning command (EVENT) at the time of prefetch determination, but also when processing related to determination of a “variation pattern designation command” at the start of variation. That is, it is provided as a dual-purpose table at the time of winning (at the time of prefetching determination) and at the start of change (when determining the change pattern at the start of change). Here, according to the winning command data selection processing procedure disclosed in the prior art, for example, Japanese Patent Application No. 2011-167886 (hereinafter referred to as “prior application A”), 46, which is selected on the basis of the winning command distribution table selection table (FIG. 46 of the previous application A: corresponding to the distribution table selection table used at the start of fluctuation in winning mode). A command distribution table (FIGS. 47 and 48 of the prior application A: corresponding to the distribution table at the start of fluctuation at the time of winning in this embodiment) ”, and based on this, a processing procedure for selecting winning command data; It has become. In addition, according to the selection processing procedure of the change start command data 1 and the change pattern distribution table second layer disclosed in the prior application A, the “variation start / distribution table selection table at the time of winning” Is a separate “variation pattern distribution table selection table (prior application A FIG. 53)” and “variation pattern distribution table first layer (prior application A) selected based on this variation pattern distribution table selection table”. 54, FIG. 55: equivalent to the variation start time distribution table in the present embodiment) ”, and based on this, the variation start command data 1 and the variation pattern distribution table second hierarchy are selected. The processing procedure is as follows.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, instead of the winning command allocation table selection table of the prior application A, a “variation table at the time of winning variation allocation selection table” that can be used in common at the time of prefetch determination and at the start of variation is provided. It is not necessary to provide separate and independent tables at the time of prefetch determination and at the start of fluctuation. As a result, as in the prior application A, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity and simplify the program, rather than providing a selection table corresponding to each of the prefetch determination and the start of fluctuation, thereby reducing the control burden on the gaming machine. Can be reduced. In particular, in the “gaming machine with a prefetch function” that generates a prefetch notice effect and enhances the gameability as in the present embodiment, the program amount is not increased due to an increase in processing related to the prefetch determination. A situation can occur that does not. However, for gaming machines that are installed in pachinko parlors, specifically, for gaming machines that are subject to No. 7 sales under the Act on Regulations on Customs Business and Optimization of Business, etc. And the rules relating to the type verification, etc., restrict the program capacity of the ROM mounted on the main board (in the present embodiment, the main control unit 20) that controls the overall game operation (the table attached to the rule). Third, technical standards related to the structure of gaming machines to prevent unauthorized modification and other changes (related to Article 6), and the reduction of program capacity are important.

(C-1: Hold addition command: FIG. 49)
Next, the hold addition command will be described. When the CPU 201 finishes the starting opening winning random number determination process (step S323 in FIG. 10 and step S343 in FIG. 11), the winning command data on the lower byte side obtained in the starting opening winning random number determining process is continued. Based on (EVENT) and the winning command data (MODE) on the upper byte side based on the current number of pending balls for operation, a “hold addition command” is created and stored in the RAM 203 without being stored in the RAM 203. (See steps S324 to S326 in FIG. 10 and steps 344 to S346 in FIG. 11).

  The reason why the pending addition command is not stored in the RAM 203 is as follows. After the hold addition command is sent from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, it is only used when the “pre-reading notice effect” relating to the current operation holding ball appears on the effect control unit 24 side. Yes, it is not particularly used in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 15) described later. Therefore, there is no particular problem even if the start opening check process (FIGS. 10 and 11) is exited without storing the pending addition command in the RAM 203. In this embodiment, various types of data obtained by a series of 'look-ahead determination' processing related to winning time processing such as winning determination processing, special stop symbol data creation processing, and start opening winning random number determination processing are stored in the RAM 203 one by one. By setting the start port check process to be completed without doing so, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity of the ROM and RAM and reduce the control burden.

  FIG. 49 shows a list of the pending addition commands. As shown in the figure, the pending addition command is composed of 2-byte control data. Specifically, the upper byte (first byte (MODE) “BXH (B6H to B9H is a special symbol 1) created according to the number of balls to be held and the special symbol type (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2). BBH to BEH correspond to 1 to 4 actuated balls of special symbol 2, respectively))), and at the start opening winning random number determination process of step S323 The lower byte (the second byte (EVENT) “XXH (XX is a numerical value corresponding to each command)”) is formed. Therefore, the hold addition command includes prefetch determination result information obtained in a series of processes (steps S317 to S323) relating to prefetch determination, specifically, prefetch variation pattern information. In the present embodiment, it is possible to create a hold addition command in a form including “information on the number of reserved balls for operation and special symbol type” and “information on the look-ahead variation pattern” and transmit this to the effect control unit 24. Although configured, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a first hold addition command including information on the number of operating balls to be held and a special symbol type (special stop symbol number) or a hit type (special symbol determination data), and a second hold addition including information on a look-ahead variation pattern The information may be divided into commands, and each piece of information may be transmitted to the effect control unit 24 using separate effect control commands.

  When the hold addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 receives the lottery and performs a lottery (prefetch notice lottery) regarding whether or not to perform the prefetch notice effect based on information included in the hold addition command. If the result of the lottery is determined to be feasible (when the pre-reading notice lottery is won), the pre-reading for the currently activated ball at the start of the symbol variation display game or at a predetermined timing during the game Make a notice effect appear. In addition, when receiving the hold addition command, the effect control unit 24 may cause a “winning effect” to appear to indicate that a winning has been made at the start opening, regardless of whether or not a pre-reading notice effect is displayed. it can.

  Even when there is a new winning when the number of balls held for operation is four or more, a holding addition command at the time of an overflow winning (hereinafter abbreviated as “OF holding addition command”) is created, and the production control unit 24 is transmitted. This OF pending addition command is also composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte (MODE) is “B5H (corresponds to special symbol 1)” or “BAH (corresponds to special symbol 2)”, and the lower byte (EVENT) is an overflow prize. “00H” is designated. The lower byte may be created during the random number determination process at the start opening prize. Also, “OF data acquisition process” for acquiring data for overflow winning (lower byte “00H”) once between the processes of steps S311 and S312 of FIG. 10 and the processes of steps S331 and S332 of FIG. If it is an overflow prize (the determination result in step S312 is “YES”, or the determination result in step S332 is “YES”), the process proceeds to step S325 or S345 as it is to create the “OF hold addition command”, If it is not an overflow prize (the determination result in step S312 is “NO”, or the determination result in step S332 is “NO”), the processing route for performing step S313 or S333 is entered, and the data (EVENT generated in the OF data acquisition process) ) “00H”) at the beginning of step S323 or S343 By rewriting the data acquired in the random number determination process at the mouth winning it may be configured to create a pending addition command purposes.

  Further, it has been described that the OF hold addition command is not used for the pre-reading determination but is used exclusively for the above “winning effect”. However, the following effect can be configured to appear. . For example, when the production control unit 24 receives the above-mentioned OF hold addition command, on the condition that there is a “big hit (may include a small hit)” among the current operation hold balls. You may comprise so that the notice effect (In-game notice effect on hold at the time of OF winning) can be shown. In this case, when receiving the hold addition command, the production control unit 24 stores the prefetch determination information storage means for storing the prefetch determination information included therein, and when receiving the OF hold addition command, On the condition that there is an item that will be a “big hit (may include a small win)” (determining whether to make a notification through a predetermined lottery) It is also possible to include an on-hold notice effect means. Furthermore, on the condition that the result of the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is “big hit (may include small hits)”, a notice effect (notice effect during fluctuation when winning OF) May be configured to be able to appear. In this case, when the effect control unit 24 receives the OF hold addition command, the effect control unit 24 notifies that there is a possibility that the game result related to the current symbol variation is “big hit (may include small hits)” (predetermined It may be determined whether or not to notify by a notification lottery). Such a notice effect is similar to the prize effect that appears upon the occurrence of an overflow prize, but the result of the symbol variation display game for which the final result has not yet been derived has been informed in advance. It plays the same role as the pre-reading notice.

(8-3. Special symbol variation start processing: FIG. 15)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S305) will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process of FIG.

  In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is zero (step S401). If the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is not zero (step S401: NO), Proceeding to the process of S403, the process (steps S403 to S416) at the start of the change for the operation holding ball to be used for the current change display is performed. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 operation holding ball number is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is zero (step S402). If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the process proceeds to step S403, and the process (steps S403 to S416) related to the start of the variation of the special symbol for the suspended action ball used for the present variation display is performed. Do. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, “priority change ranking” indicating which of the special figure 1 operation holding sphere and the special figure 2 operation holding sphere is preferentially used for the change display operation (whether the operation holding sphere is digested). "Is decided. The processing in steps S401 and S402 is performed as “priority change means” for preferentially digesting the special figure 2 operation holding ball when both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball exist. Function.

  In the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball exists in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball by the priority changing means, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested, that is, The special symbol variation display game 2 is executed more preferentially than the special symbol variation display game 1. More specifically, on the condition that the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is stopped and displayed, the first reserved storage area (first reserved storage means (the reserved storage area related to the operation reserved ball on the special symbol 1 side)). ) Is stored with the hold data relating to the special symbol 1 (first hold memory: special figure 1 operation hold ball), the second hold storage area (second hold storage means (the operation hold ball on the special symbol 2 side) If the second reserved data relating to the special symbol 2 (second reserved memory: special figure 2 operation holding ball) is not stored in the reserved memory area))), the second of the first reserved data When the second special hold data is stored in the second reserved storage area while the variable display of the first special symbol based on the previously stored reserved data is started, the first reserved The first hold data is stored in the storage area. Regardless of whether or not they are 憶, so as to start earliest variable display of the second special symbol based on the stored pending data out of the second pending data.

  In addition, when the number of operation hold balls of both the special figure 2 operation hold ball number and the special figure 1 operation hold ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), this “no operation hold ball” state Is a case where the special symbol is in a standby state and has no reserved memory, and informs the effect control unit 24 that it has entered this state. Therefore, if “no operation hold ball” is reached, the process proceeds to step S417, the special symbol operation status is switched to “standby (00H)” (00H is stored in the special symbol operation status: step S418), and the production control command Then, a “demonstration display command” for displaying the demonstration screen is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S419). If the effect control unit 24 does not receive an effect control command (for example, a hold addition command) related to the symbol variation display game even after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the demonstration display command, the variation display operation is not performed for a certain period of time. It is assumed that a state (standby waiting state) has occurred, and the liquid crystal display device 36 performs “demonstration screen display” to notify that the game standby state is in progress.

  If the number of special figure 1 action hold balls or the number of special figure 2 action hold balls is not zero (step S401: NO or S402: NO), to start the change of the special symbol for the action hold ball for the current fluctuation display Such processing (steps S403 to S417) is performed. In addition, about the process of step S403-S417 demonstrated below, when it is "NO" by determination of said step S401, it is the process for the special figure 2 action holding ball, and by determination of said step S402. If it is NO ', it will be the processing for the special figure 1 action holding ball, but the way of processing is the same, so unless there is a special need to avoid duplicate description, the action holding on the special symbol 1 side The description will be made without distinguishing whether the process is a process for a sphere or a process for an operation holding ball on the special symbol 2 side.

  If it progresses to step S403, 1 will subtract the number of operation reservation balls (the number of operation reservation balls concerning the special symbol side used for the present variable display operation -1: step S403), The “subtraction command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S404).

  Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type of the current variation start side. For example, if special symbol 1 is the variation start side, “00H” is indicated, and special symbol 2 is the variation start side. If there is, “01H” is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

  Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the hold data (the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the fluctuation pattern random number) stored in the hold storage area (hold 1 storage area) corresponding to the hold storage number n = 1. 1 and the variation pattern random number 2) are read out and stored in the random number storage area for determination of the RAM 203, and the reserved storage area (hold 2 storage area, reserved) corresponding to the reserved n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) The storage data stored in the storage area 3 and the storage area 4 is stored in the storage area corresponding to 'n-1' (step S406), and the storage area 4 is cleared (step S407). That is, the hold data in the hold 1 storage area is shifted to the random number storage area for determination, and the hold data after the hold 2 storage area is numbered one by one (hold 2 storage area → hold 1 storage area, hold 3 storage). Area → holding 2 storage area, holding 4 storage area → holding 3 storage area) and overwriting, and providing an empty area in the holding 4 storage area (if no new active holding ball is generated, processing in step S407) Since the vacant area is sequentially shifted each time the operation is performed, the entire reserved storage area becomes an empty area when all the operating spheres are used. As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game coincides with the order of the number n of the operation reservation balls (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and any of the operation reservation balls acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is stored. Whether the area corresponds to the area is specified, and the storage of a new operation holding ball becomes possible.

  Next, remaining short time command transmission processing is performed (step S408). Here, it is determined whether or not a special symbol short-time counter (counter for counting the remaining number of times until the special symbol short-time state is terminated) described later is zero. A “remaining short time number command” including the remaining short time number information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S408). The “remaining short time number command” is used when the remaining time short number information is notified on the effect control unit 24 side.

  Next, a random determination process for determining the special electronic component operation is performed (step S409). In this special electronic component activation determination random number determination process, a “winning lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed using a random number for jackpot determination. Note that the random determination process for determining the operation of the special electronic component is “random determination process” (step S319 in FIG. 10, step S339 in FIG. 11, that is one of the “prefetch determination” processes in that “winning lottery” is performed. This is a process that works in the same way as “see FIG. 12 showing the details”, but here, unlike “winning lottery” in “look-ahead determination”, the operation holding ball used for the current variable display operation is targeted The “winning lottery” in “determination at the start of change”. The details of the special electronic component activation determination random number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the random determination process for determining the special electric component operation in step S409 is completed, a special stop symbol creation process is performed (step S410). In this special stop symbol creation process, the “symbol lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed by using the winning lottery result and the special symbol determination random number value of the random determination processing for special electric utility operation determination in step S409. Do. The special stop symbol creation process is “special stop symbol data creation process (step S322 in FIG. 10, step S339 in FIG. 11, its details), which is one of the“ prefetch determination ”processes in that“ design lottery ”is performed. 13) ”, but here, unlike“ symbol drawing ”in“ look-ahead determination ”, the target is a suspended ball used for the current variable display operation. This is a “symbol drawing” in “determination at the start of change”. Details of the special symbol stop symbol creation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 is completed, a game state transition preparation process is performed (step S411). In the game state transition preparation process, a setting process necessary for designating the game state after the big hit game is performed as a setting for shifting the game state. Based on the data set here, the gaming state after the big hit game is specified. Details of the game state transition preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game state transition preparation process in step S411 is completed, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is performed (step S412). In this special symbol variation pattern creation process, the winning lottery result obtained in the special electric utility activation determination random number determination processing, the symbol lottery result of the special stop symbol creation processing, the variation pattern random number 1, and the variation pattern random number 2 are obtained. The variation pattern of the special symbol to be used for this variation display operation is determined, and a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern is created as an effect control command. Note that the special symbol variation pattern creation process is a random number determination process at the time of winning a winning prize, which is one of the 'look-ahead determination' processing in terms of determining the variation pattern of the special symbol, and a creation process related to the pending addition command (step of FIG. 10) S323 to S325, steps S343 to S345 in FIG. 11 (see FIG. 14). However, here, a special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the current variable display operation is shown. A variation pattern, that is, a variation pattern at the start of variation is determined. Details of the special symbol variation pattern creation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, 5AH (ON state) is stored in a special symbol N changing flag (N = 1, 2) for designating that the change display is being performed (step S413). The “special symbol N changing flag” is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), the special symbol changes. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol 1 changing flag (N = 1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 changing flag (N = 2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

  Next, a decorative symbol designation command is created based on the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 (step S414) and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol designation command is composed of two bytes: an upper byte (MODE) that designates a special symbol type on the variable side, and a lower byte (EVNET) that designates a big hit type, a small hit, and a loss. Therefore, this decorative symbol designation command includes the special symbol type on the variable side and part of the winning category information. Specifically, the upper byte (MODE) side is “BBH” when the special symbol on the variable side is special symbol 1, “BCH” when the special symbol is 2, and the lower byte (EVENT) side is In case of loss, “01H” regardless of the type, “05H” in case of small hit regardless of type, “05H” in case of big hit, 2R short open latent big hit is “02H”, 10R long open positive variable big hit “03H” and 15R long open probability variation big hit “04H” are selected. This decoration designating command mainly determines the combination of the decorative design (reach design) when forming the reach state and the combination of the decorative design (decoration stop design) to be finally stopped and displayed on the production control unit 24 side. It is used when doing.

  Then, as the change start time setting process, the special symbol operation status is switched to “Fluctuating (02H)” (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the determination random number storage area (cleared to zero) (step S416). ).

  As described above, when the special symbol variation start processing is exited, the special symbol display data update processing (step S309) of FIG. 9 is performed, and thus the special symbol variation display is started. As a result, the special symbol management process (step S59) is exited and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S60) of FIG.

(8-3-1. Random number determination process for determining the operation of special electric appliances (winning determination process at the start of change): FIG. 16)
Next, the random number determination process (step S409) for determining the special electric component operation will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the random determination process for determining the special electric component operation in FIG.

  In FIG. 16, the CPU 201 first determines the random number determination table for special figure 1 (see FIG. 40 (a)) or the random number determination table for special figure 2 (see FIG. 40 (b)) based on the special symbol operation confirmation data. ) Is acquired (step S421), and the jackpot determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired (step S422).

  Next, a random number determination process is performed (step S423: random number determination process of variation start process). Here, the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag are acquired based on the big hit determination random value and the current big hit lottery probability state with reference to the hit random number determination table acquired in the process of step S421. Then, this random number determination process is exited while the acquired state of the big hit determination flag and the state of the small hit determination flag are taken into the registers (A register and D register).

  In other words, the random number determination process in step S423 is “random number determination process in winning process (random number determination process in special figure 1 start opening check process (step S319 in FIG. 10), random determination process in special figure 2 start opening check process” (Step S339 in FIG. 11)) ”. That is, both are configured as a common processing module, and as a result, the same program configuration can be used. In this way, the random number determination process of the winning process and the random number determination process of the fluctuation start process can be used as a common processing module, so that when independent processes are provided (in separate programs) The amount of programs and the amount of memory can be reduced more than the description), and the control burden can be reduced.

  In particular, in the “gaming machine with a pre-reading function” that generates a pre-reading notice effect and enhances the gameability as in the present embodiment, as described above, the program is increased due to an increase in processing related to the pre-reading determination. Situations can arise where the amount has to be increased. However, for gaming machines that are subject to No. 7 sales under the Act on Regulations on Customs Sales, etc. and Optimization of Business, such as those installed in pachinko parlors, the rules regarding the recognition of the gaming machines and the type verification etc. Therefore, the program capacity of the ROM mounted on the main board (in this embodiment, which corresponds to the main control unit 20) that controls the overall game operation is limited (Table 3 of the same rule, unauthorized modification and other Reduction of program capacity and technical standards related to the structure of gaming machines for preventing changes (related to Article 6) are important.

  After exiting the random number determination process in step S423, the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag held in each register are stored in the hit determination flag area of the RAM 203 (step S424). The reason why the data obtained by the random number determination process in step S423 is stored in the RAM 203 is as follows. The data obtained in the random number determination process of the random determination process for the special electronic component operation determination (big hit determination flag, small hit determination flag) is not data that is used immediately and is not necessary thereafter, but a special symbol later This is because the data is necessary in the variation pattern creation process (step S412) and the special electric accessory process (step S60). When the process of step S424 is completed, the process exits the special electric utility operation determination random number determination process and proceeds to the special stop symbol creation process (step S410) of FIG.

(8-3-2. Special stop symbol creation process (variation start special stop symbol determination process): FIG. 17)
Next, the special stop symbol creation process (step S410) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing details of the special stop symbol creation process of FIG.

  In FIG. 17, the CPU 201 first selects the special symbol 1 symbol table selection table (see FIG. 41 (b)) or the special symbol 2 symbol table selection table (see FIG. 41 (b)) based on the special symbol operation confirmation data. ) Is acquired (step S425).

  Subsequently, the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the random number storage area for determination is acquired (step S426), and the winning lottery result obtained by the random determination processing for special electric utility operation determination in step S409, that is, the big hit determination flag And a small hit determination flag are acquired (step S427).

  Next, a special stop symbol data creation process is performed (step S428: special stop symbol data creation process of the fluctuation start process). In this special stop symbol data creation process, the symbol table corresponding to the winning lottery result of the random determination process for special electric utility operation determination is referred to with reference to the symbol table selection table acquired in step S425 (see FIGS. 42 to 44). And the special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset value corresponding to the special symbol determination random number acquired in step S426 are acquired with reference to the symbol table. Then, with the acquired special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset in the registers (A register, B register, and C register), the special stop symbol data creation processing is exited.

  The special stop symbol data creation process in step S428 is “special stop symbol data creation process in winning process (special stop symbol data creation process in special figure 1 start opening check process (step S322 in FIG. 10), special figure 2 start opening”. The processing content is the same as the special stop symbol data creation processing (step S342 in FIG. 11)) of the check processing. That is, both are configured as a common processing module, and as a result, the same program configuration can be used. As described above, the special stop symbol data creation process of the winning process and the special stop symbol data creation process of the fluctuation start process can be used as a common processing module, thereby providing separate and independent processes (separately) This can contribute to a reduction in the amount of programs and the amount of memory rather than a separate program). In the present embodiment, in addition to the random number determination processing in step S423, the special stop symbol data creation processing in step S428 is also configured to be used as a processing module common to the winning time processing, so further program amount and This contributes to a reduction in the amount of memory and can reduce the control burden.

  When the special stop symbol data creation process in step S428 is exited, the special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset stored in each register are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 (step S429). The RAM 203 is provided with a dedicated storage area for storing these data (special symbol determination data storage region, special symbol stop symbol number storage region, variation pattern selection offset storage region).

  Here, the reason why the data obtained by the special stop symbol data creation processing in step S428 is stored in the RAM 203 is as follows. The data (special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number, and variation pattern selection offset) obtained in the special stop symbol data generation process of the special stop symbol generation process is a random number determination process for determining the special electric component operation in step S409. Similar to the data obtained in the above, it is not data that is immediately used and is not necessary thereafter, but is required in the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) or the special electric accessory process (step S60). Because it becomes the data which becomes. When the process of step S429 is completed, the process exits the special stop symbol creation process and proceeds to the game state transition preparation process (step S411) of FIG.

(8-3-3. Game state transition preparation process: FIG. 18)
Next, the gaming state transition preparation process (step S411) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing details of the game state transition preparation process of FIG.

  In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first acquires a jackpot determination flag and determines the state of the jackpot determination flag (step S431). If the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S431: ≠ 5AH), the game state transition preparation process is exited without doing anything.

  When the big hit determination flag is ON (= 5 AH) (step S431: = 5 AH), a big hit gaming state transition table selection table is acquired (step S432).

  Next, with reference to the acquired gaming state transition table selection table, a big hit gaming state transition table corresponding to the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the big hit type (special symbol determination data) is acquired (step S433).

(T-8. Big hit gaming state transition table selection table: FIG. 50)
FIG. 50 shows a jackpot gaming state transition table selection table. The jackpot gaming state transition table selection table of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of gaming state transition tables (“JTTBL-B1”, “JTTBL-B2”) associated with the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the special symbol determination data. ": Refer to FIG. 51 described later). Specifically, based on the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the special symbol determination data, any one of the big hit gaming state transition tables is determined. ing.

  Here, the “gaming state determination number (YJ)” is data for identifying the internal gaming state. Referring to the variation pattern distribution designation number table of FIG. 57, when the game state determination number (YJ) is “00H”, “normal game state (no power support, low probability)” is set to “01H "" Indicates a latent state (without electric support, high accuracy) ", and" 02H "indicates" probability change state (with electric support, high accuracy) ". Therefore, the game state determination number (YJ) is different from the data for identifying the game state itself, such as the variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode), in that it identifies the internal game state as described above.

(T-9. Game state transition table for jackpot: FIG. 51)
FIG. 51 shows the above-mentioned jackpot gaming state transition table. The jackpot gaming state transition table of this embodiment includes “JTTBL-1” and “JTTBL-2”. In these jackpot game state transition tables, a plurality of types of data groups for designating a game state (in the present embodiment, an internal game state) to be transitioned after the jackpot game is defined. Specifically, the utility power release extended transition buffer, normal symbol short transition buffer, normal symbol likelihood transition buffer, special symbol short transition transition buffer, special symbol probability transition transition buffer, special symbol short transition counter buffer Various data to be stored in the special symbol probability variation counter buffer, the variation pattern allocation designation number buffer, and the special symbol variation count counter buffer are defined. The values stored in these buffers are read at a necessary timing and set in a predetermined flag storage area or a predetermined counter storage area provided in the RAM 203. When various data specified by each game state transition table are stored in each buffer, the game state after the big hit game is determined. In this embodiment, “JTTBL-B1” is a gaming state transition table for shifting to a “probability change state” and “JTTBL-B2” is a “latency probability state”. The role of the various buffers described above will be described below.

(General power utility opening extension transition state buffer)
The “general utility release extension transition state buffer” is used to set a general utility release extension state flag. The “general utility release extension state flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the release extension function. When the flag is ON (= 5 AH), The state is “present state”, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the open extension function is inactive and “no electric support” state.

(Normal symbol short transition buffer)
The “normal symbol short time transition state buffer” is used to set a normal symbol short time state flag. The “ordinary symbol short time state flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the normal symbol short time function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the “normal symbol short time state flag” indicating that the normal symbol short time function is in operation. State ", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the normal symbol short function is not activated and the" normal symbol non-short state ".

(Normal symbol change transition buffer)
The “normal symbol probability change state buffer” is used to set a normal symbol probability change state flag. The “normal symbol probability changing state flag” is a flag for designating an auxiliary lottery probability state, that is, an operating state of the normal symbol probability changing function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the normal symbol probability changing function is set. It indicates that the state is the “probability change state per assistance” during operation, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that it is a “low probability state per assistance” in which the normal symbol probability change function is not activated.

(Special symbol short state transition state buffer)
The “special symbol short time state transition state buffer” is used for setting a special symbol short time state flag. The “special symbol short time state flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the special symbol short time function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the “special symbol short time state flag” during the special symbol short time function is operating. State ", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol non-time-short state is inactive.

(Special Symbol Probability Transition Status Buffer)
The “special symbol probability change state buffer” is used to set a special symbol probability change state flag. The “special symbol probability changing state flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the “high probability state during the special symbol probability changing function is operating”. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol probability changing function is not activated in a “low probability state”.

(Special design short time counter buffer)
The “special symbol short time counter buffer” is used to set a special symbol short time counter. The above “special symbol time reduction counter” means the number of remaining times until the operation of the “special symbol time reduction function” is terminated due to the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (the number of executions of the special variation display game). It is a counter for counting the remaining number of times until the end. It is a counter for counting. In the present embodiment, with the end of the special symbol short-time state, the high base gaming state, which is in the state of electrical support, is also ended (see step S481 in FIG. 21B).

(Special symbol variation counter buffer)
The “special symbol probability variation counter buffer” is used to set a special symbol probability variation counter. The above “special symbol probability change counter” means the remaining number of times until the operation of the “special symbol probability change function” is finished, that is, the “high probability state” is ended due to the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (the number of executions of the special variation display game). It is a counter for counting the remaining number of times until the number of times (remaining ST number).

(Variation pattern distribution specification number buffer)
The “variation pattern allocation designation number buffer” is used to set a variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode). This variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is set in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area of the RAM 203.

(Special symbol variation counter buffer)
The “special symbol variation number counter buffer” is used for setting a special symbol variation number counter. The “special symbol variation counter” is a counter for counting the number of times of variation of a special symbol that is a gaming state transition condition (hereinafter referred to as “the prescribed number of gaming state transitions”). In the present embodiment, for example, when “small hit C” or “2R short open latency probability change big hit” is won, the game state transition specified number of times of “normal C” to “normal A” is 30 times. Is set.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 18 again, the CPU 201 performs a state buffer setting process after the process of step S433 (step S434). In this state buffer setting process, referring to the gaming state transition table acquired in the process of step S433, the general utility release extended transition state buffer, normal symbol time transition state buffer, normal symbol probability transition state buffer, special symbol time reduction State transition state buffer, special symbol probability change transition state buffer, special symbol time change count buffer, special symbol probability change count counter buffer, variation pattern allocation designation number buffer, and special symbol variation count counter buffer Store the data specified in the table. The values stored in these buffers are read out in the process of step S594 during the big hit end process of FIG. 30 described later, and stored in predetermined storage areas of the RAM 203 (flag storage areas and counter storage areas corresponding to the respective buffers). Stored. Thereby, the game state transition preparation process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) in FIG.

(8-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern creation processing (variation pattern creation processing at the start of variation): FIG. 19)
Next, the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation pattern creation processing of FIG.

  In this special symbol variation pattern creation processing, a variation pattern designation command for determining and creating a variation pattern of a special symbol (variation pattern at the start of variation) (steps S441 to S449), and a variation pattern designation command The process is mainly configured to transmit to the effect control unit 24 (step S450).

In the process of determining the variation pattern designation command for designating the variation pattern of the special symbol,
(A) With reference to the variation start time distribution table selection table (FIG. 46) for winning, the variation start time allocation according to the variation pattern selection offset value and the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) “Fluctuation pattern distribution table first hierarchy determination process (steps S441 to S443)” for determining the tables (FIGS. 47 and 48);
(B) With reference to the above-mentioned fluctuation start time sharing table at the time of winning, the fluctuation start command data 1 corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper byte side (MODE) data of the fluctuation pattern designation command) and the fluctuation pattern “Variation pattern distribution table second hierarchy determination process (steps S444 to S445)” for determining the distribution table second hierarchy (see FIGS. 53 and 54);
(C) Referring to the second hierarchy of the variation pattern distribution table, variation start command data 2 (lower byte (EVENT) data of variation pattern designation command) corresponding to variation pattern random number 2 and variation time table (Variation pattern determination processing (steps S446 to S447)) for determining (not shown);
(D) “Special symbol variation time setting process (step S448) for determining the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the variation time table,
(E) A “variation pattern designation command creation process (step S449)” for creating a variation pattern designation command based on the variation start command data 1 and the variation start command data 2 is included.

  Note that the “variation table at the time of winning variation combination” used during the special symbol variation pattern creation processing is, as already described, the start opening winning random number determination processing related to the prefetch determination processing (step of FIG. 10). S323, which is also used in step S343 of FIG. 11, is used here when determining “variation start command data 1 and variation pattern distribution table second layer”. The “variation pattern distribution table second layer” is used when determining the variation start command data 2 and the variation time table, and the “variation time table” includes the variation time (variation display operation time of the special symbol). ) Is used when determining.

  Further, the “variation start command data 1” determined by the “variation start / distribution distribution table at the time of winning” is the “basic pattern” which is the gist (base) of the special pattern variation pattern (variation pattern at the start of variation). ”(The upper byte side (MODE) of the variation pattern designation command), and“ variation start command data 2 ”determined by the“ variation pattern distribution table second layer ”is the basic pattern described above. Is data (designating the lower byte (EVENT) of the variation pattern designation command) designating the “detail pattern” which is the specific content of Here, the above-mentioned “basic pattern” refers to a “variation pattern type” (for example, “weak SP”) in which a plurality of types of variation patterns are focused on the characteristics of the variation mode and grouped together. “Reach A” type, “weak SP reach B” type, etc.), and “detailed pattern” means a “variation pattern type” (for example, “weak SP reach A1 to 1” included in the basic pattern (variation pattern type)). A3 ”and“ variation patterns such as “weak SP reach B1 to B3”).

  Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, an outline of a procedure for determining a variation pattern at the start of variation will be described.

  The CPU 201 also uses the “starting-use variation start time allocation table selection table (FIG. 46)” that is also used in the starting opening winning random number determination process (step S323 in FIG. 10 and step S343 in FIG. 11) related to the prefetch determination process. After determining the “variation table at the time of winning variation at the time of winning (FIGS. 48 and 49)”, the lottery used for the random number 1 for the variation pattern is referred to by referring to the “distribution table at the time of winning and changing start” The “variation pattern type (basic pattern)” is determined by processing (steps S441 to S445). At this time, the “variation pattern distribution table second layer” for determining the “variation pattern type (detailed pattern)” is also determined.

  Next, referring to the “floating pattern distribution table second layer”, the “variation pattern type” included in the variation pattern type is determined by lottery processing using the random number 2 for variation pattern (steps S446 to S447). . In other words, in the present embodiment, a hierarchical process having a hierarchical structure such as the first hierarchy and the second hierarchy and using a hierarchical process executed in order from the first hierarchy is used to sequentially determine a plurality of types of random numbers for variation patterns. As a result, the target fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is determined. In other words, when paying attention to the determination of the “variation pattern at the start of variation”, the above-mentioned distribution start variation distribution table at the time of winning is the “variation pattern distribution table first layer used for the processing of the first layer. The variation pattern distribution table first layer determines the “variation pattern distribution table second layer”, thereby determining the variation pattern at the start of variation.

  In the present embodiment, “two-level processing” is shown in which “variation pattern type” is determined in the first layer, and “variation pattern type” that is the specific content is determined in the second layer. However, when n (2 ≦ n) fluctuation pattern random numbers are acquired, an n-layer process may be executed. For example, when three types of random numbers 1 to 3 for the variation pattern are acquired, in the first hierarchy, the variation pattern type higher than the variation pattern type of the present embodiment (for example, “weak SP”). The 'weak SP reach' type, which combines the 'reach A' type and the 'weak SP reach B' type as the fluctuation pattern type of the same system, and the 'strong SP reach A' type and the 'strong SP reach B' type The “strong SP reach” type or the like collected as the fluctuation pattern type is determined, and in the second layer, the fluctuation pattern type (for example, “weak SP reach” type included in the higher-level fluctuation pattern type is determined. If so, the “weak SP reach A” type and the “weak SP reach B” type) are determined, and in the third layer, the type of variation pattern included in the variation pattern type determined in the second layer It is possible to adopt a "three-hierarchical processing," such as determining the. Such hierarchical processing is effective when the types of variation patterns are abundant and the processing becomes complicated if only one type of variation pattern random number is determined. When predicting a variation pattern at the start of variation in the prefetch determination, the outline of the variation pattern type can be determined using the same variation pattern random number (variation pattern random value 1) as in this embodiment. Is also effective.

  The information regarding the variation pattern determined in this way is transmitted from the main control unit 20 side to the effect control unit 24 side by a “variation pattern designation command” that allows the content to be specified. On the side of the effect control unit 24, the main effect scenario developed during the current symbol variation display game is determined based on the contents of the variation pattern designation command. Hereinafter, the processing methods (A) to (E) will be specifically described.

(A) Fluctuation pattern distribution table first hierarchy determination process (steps S441 to S443)
In FIG. 19, the CPU 201 first corrects the variation pattern selection offset value obtained by the special stop symbol creation processing in step S410 (step S441: variation start selection variation pattern selection offset correction processing). Here, from the “variation start / distribution distribution selection table selection table (FIG. 46)”, the “variation start distribution combination table (winning pattern distribution table first layer: FIGS. 47 and 48)” is selected. As data for selection, a predetermined correction process is performed on the variation pattern selection offset value obtained in the special stop symbol creation process, and a process of acquiring a new variation pattern selection offset value is performed.

  As already described, the variation pattern selection offset value before the correction processing in step S441 shown in FIG. 52 (a) (offset value before variation start correction) is obtained in the winning time processing shown in FIG. 45 (a). This value is the same as the fluctuation pattern selection offset value (pre-correction offset value at the time of winning a prize). It is necessary to correct. The processing related to this correction is the variation start time variation pattern selection offset correction processing in step S411.

  With reference to FIG. 52, the offset correction processing for selecting a variation pattern at the start of variation in step S441 will be described. FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the “offset correction process for selecting variation pattern at the start of variation” in step S441. FIG. 52A is obtained by the special stop symbol creation process (step S410 in FIG. 15). A list of fluctuation pattern selection offset values (hereinafter referred to as “offset values before correction at the start of fluctuation”) and their contents are shown in FIG. And a list of the contents thereof.

  52 (a), for example, when the offset value before correction at the start of change is “00H”, the winning lottery (step S409 in FIG. 15) and the symbol lottery ( The determination result based on (Step S410 in FIG. 15) is “Lose A”, and the number of the special figure 1 operation holding balls at the start of the fluctuation indicates “0” (in the figure, “hold 0” to “hold 4” are Indicates the number of active balls at the start of the change). Further, for example, when the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning is “04H”, the determination result based on the winning lottery and the symbol lottery at the start of the fluctuation for the special figure 2 operation holding ball is “losing A”, Special figure 2 The number of reserved balls for operation indicates “0”, and in addition, the offset value for selecting a variation pattern obtained by the special stop symbol creation process and its contents are shown (the symbol table shown in FIGS. 42 to 44). (Refer to the “Offset value” column).

  Here, the pre-correction offset value at the time of winning (see FIG. 45 (a)) and the pre-change start offset value at the start of variation (see FIG. 52 (a)) are common offset values. , “Process for correcting to offset value for selecting variation pattern according to number of suspended balls” is performed. Specifically, the offset values 01H to 03H and 05H to 07H, which are vacant numbers, are added to the offset value “00H” or “04H” before correction at the time of starting the fluctuation, so that the offset values 01H to 03H and 05H to 07H, which are empty numbers. The number is corrected to an offset value corresponding to the number.

  Specifically, in the correction process in step S441, the special symbol operation confirmation data is confirmed. If the special symbol type on the fluctuation start side is the special symbol 1, the current special value is set to the offset value “00H” before the fluctuation start correction. 1 is added, and when the special symbol type on the fluctuation start side is special symbol 2, the current special figure 2 active ball is added to the offset value “04H” before fluctuation start correction. (Step S441). However, the “current number of pending balls for operation” to be added is the number of pending balls for operation that presupposes that the reserved balls for the current variable display operation will be digested. This is the number of active suspension balls obtained by the subtraction process in step S403 of FIG.

  The variation pattern selection offset value (offset value after variation start correction) obtained by this correction processing and its contents are as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the offset value is used, and the target “variation start / distribution table at the time of winning change” (FIG. 47, FIG. 48) is selected from the “variation start / distribution table selection table (FIG. 46)”. "Is selected (steps S441 to S443).

  Specifically, when the correction process of step S441 is completed, the above-mentioned distribution table selection table for the variation start at the time of winning is acquired (step S442), and the combined distribution table selection table for the variation start at the time of winning is referenced. Then, a variation table at the time of winning change is obtained according to the variation pattern selection offset value corrected in step S441 and the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) (step S443). The processing of steps S441 to S443 is the same as the processing procedure of steps S371 to S373 (see FIG. 14) in the start opening winning random number determination processing (step S323 in FIG. 10 and step S343 in FIG. 11) already described. . Therefore, steps S371 to S373 in the start opening winning random number determination process can be used as a common processing module in the above-described steps S441 to S443 in the special symbol variation pattern creation process. In this case, by using both as a common processing module, the amount of program and memory can be reduced and the control burden can be reduced as compared with the case where separate independent processing is provided (described as separate independent programs). Can do.

(T-10. Distribution table selection table used at the start of variation at the time of winning a prize (at the start of variation): FIG. 46)
For the “variation start / distribution table selection table at the time of winning change”, which is referred to in the variation pattern distribution table first hierarchy determination process (steps S441 to S443), the start opening winning random number determination process (see FIG. 10 step S323 and FIG.11 step S343), detailed description thereof will be omitted to avoid duplication.

  In the above step S443, the "variation table at the time of winning variation start and distribution" taking into account the number of suspended balls is selected. Of course, in order to further enhance the gameability, a special symbol that takes into account the number of balls held in operation in one gaming state can be selected according to the gaming state and the number of balls held in operation. Therefore, it is desired to have a variety of gaming characteristics such that a variation pattern of a special symbol can be selected without taking into consideration the number of reserved balls in other gaming states.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the distribution table selection table for use at the time of winning change is determined as follows. When the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is “00H” or “01H” in the variation start / allocation allocation table selection table, that is, when “Normal A” or “Normal B” variation starts In the shared allocation table selection table, even if the winning type is the same, a different variation start time allocation distribution table is selected according to the number of held balls, and on the other hand, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) In the “02H”, that is, “Normal C” variation start / distribution allocation table selection table, the same variation variation start / distribution allocation table is selected regardless of the number of suspended balls. (For example, refer to the column of offset values 00H to 04H of the winning type “Special Figure 1 Loss A”). In other words, in the “Normal A” or “Normal B” winning change variation allocation table, different table data (alternating variation start allocation distribution tables H1 to H4) depending on the operation-pending ball is stored. Regardless of the action-holding ball, the same table data (winning variation start / distribution distribution table H9) is defined in the “normal C” variation start / distribution distribution table. .

  It should be noted that the number of win-time variation start and distribution table data stored in the winning change-and-change distribution table selection table corresponding to each gaming state (variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode)) is as follows. If they are different from each other, it may be necessary to provide a variation pattern selection offset value corresponding to each gaming state, or it may be necessary to correct the variation pattern selection offset value for each gaming state. As a result, the processing becomes complicated and the control burden increases. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the number of table data stored in the distribution table selection table for each game state at the time of winning variation is set to the same number in each game state, and the variation pattern corresponding to each game state is selected. By eliminating the need to set an offset value separately, the processing is simplified and the control burden is reduced.

(B) Fluctuation pattern distribution table second hierarchy determination process (steps S444 to S445)
Next, the variation pattern distribution table second hierarchy determination process (steps S444 to S445) will be described. After acquiring the winning change / distribution start allocation table in the process of step S443, the CPU 201 acquires the variation pattern random number value 1 stored in the determination random number storage area of the RAM 203 (step S444). The “variation start command data 1” and the “variation pattern distribution table second layer” corresponding to the random number 1 for the variation pattern are acquired by referring to the time variation start / distribution distribution table (step S445).

(T-11. Fluctuation start / distribution distribution table at the time of winning (at the start of change): FIGS. 47 and 48)
With reference to FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, the above-mentioned distribution table at the time of the start of variation at the time of winning is referred to in the variation pattern distribution table second hierarchy determination process (steps S444 to S445). Note that the same contents as those described in the start opening winning random number determination process (step S323 in FIG. 10 and step S343 in FIG. 11) related to the prefetch determination process are duplicated for the “variation table at the time of winning variation start”. In order to avoid the description, the description is omitted as appropriate.

  Referring to FIGS. 47 and 48, the above-mentioned variable start time distribution table at the time of winning includes a random number for variation pattern 1, a variation start command data 1 and a second hierarchy of variation pattern distribution table (FIG. 53 to be described later). , FIG. 54) is determined in association with a determination area (determination value). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the random number value 1 for the variation pattern belongs to at the start of variation. Thus, the change start command data 1 and the change pattern distribution table second hierarchy are determined (see the “change start” columns in FIGS. 47 and 48).

  In the present embodiment, since the above-mentioned distribution table at the start of variation at the time of winning is provided as a table for both pre-reading determination and at the start of variation, the “pre-reading variation” determined in the process at the time of winning (pre-reading determination). The “pattern” and the “basic pattern” determined in the process at the start of variation are the same except for “undefined (normal variation / reach)” (“first layer determination content” in FIG. 47, (Refer to the “Winning” and “Variation start” columns).

  The reason for this is as follows. In relation to the production control, at the time of winning (at the time of prefetch determination), the main control unit 20 sends a “hold addition command” including prefetch fluctuation pattern information to the production control unit 24, and the production control unit 24 receiving this sends the hold. Based on the addition command, effect control relating to the pre-reading notice effect is performed. On the other hand, at the start of change, the main control unit 20 sends the change pattern designation command including change pattern information at the start of change to the effect control unit 24. Upon receiving the effect control unit 24, the effect control related to the notice effect in the symbol variation display game is performed based on the variation pattern designation command. For this reason, if the information about the prefetch variation pattern received by the production control unit 24 and the information about the basic pattern of the variation pattern at the start of the variation do not match, the contents of the prefetch announcement effect and the symbol variation display game The content of the notice effect will be inconsistent, and not only will the significance of providing the pre-read notice effect be lost, but it will also cause distrust to the gaming machine and reduce the player's willingness to play. It is. As such a case, for example, the hold display relating to the pre-reading notice effect changes to a lustrous “rainbow” and the “predictive pre-reading notice effect” that informs the jackpot winning is confirmed. There is a case where the result of the symbol variation display game for the operation holding ball becomes “losing”. It should be noted that the loss start winning and changing distribution table H2 to H4 does not correspond to the winning change and distribution starting distribution table that can be selected at the start of the change. In the case of “losing A”, the content of the basic pattern that can be selected here is the same as that of the allocation table H1 at the time of the start of the change for winning the winning for the lost game. Only the selectivity is different. With respect to the loss start winning variation combined allocation table H2 to H4, the presence of “indefinite (ordinary variation pattern or reachable variation pattern designation)” indicates the relationship between the look-ahead variation pattern and the basic pattern at the beginning of variation. The above-mentioned problem does not occur by providing a pre-reading notice effect with a relatively low probability of winning big hits with a high probability.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead variation pattern and the basic pattern at the start of variation are closely related, and when the rendering control unit 24 determines these renderings, both contents do not contradict each other. I am doing so.

  However, as an exceptional production mode, a production mode in which “the content of the pre-reading notice effect ≠ the content of the basic pattern”, that is, a production mode in which a contradiction may occur that “the content of the pre-reading fluctuation pattern ≠ the content of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation” (Contradiction effect) may be included. For example, even if the hold display related to the pre-reading notice effect is a “red” display that increases the expectation of winning a big hit, during the symbol variation display game for the operation holding ball, there is no hot notice effect. If the “red” display is, for example, “SP reach confirmation” hold display, the target action ball is the target. An example of such an effect is that N reach is made to appear during the symbol variation display game. In order to prevent the player from feeling distrust due to the contradiction, such a performance mode is selected with a very low probability in the case of a loss, and most of them are selected only in the case of a big win. It is preferable to select only when winning a big hit. In this way, when the contradictory effect occurs, the contradictory effect can be made to function as a kind of premium effect such that the degree of expectation for winning the big hit is extremely increased or the big win winning decision is notified. The “contradiction effect” as described above is effective in enhancing the fun of the game in that the result is contrary to the expectation after deceiving the player temporarily.

(U-1: Distributing table at the start of change at the time of winning a winning game (at the start of change): FIG. 48)
The losing win-time variation start / distribution allocation table of this embodiment includes the following characteristic elements. If attention is paid to the distribution table H5 and H7 for losing winning variation, both of these are selected in the case of “Special Figure 1 Lost B”. The minute table H5 is selected when “normal A” is selected, and the distribution table H5 for the start of variation for lost winning is selected as “normal B” (see FIG. 48). “Lose B” is a type of loss that is selected with a lower probability than “Lose A” (see FIG. 44B). Here, referring to FIG. 48, both of the loss start winning change and distribution table H5 and H7 are selected from a plurality of common basic patterns (weak SP reach A or strong SP reach A). One basic pattern is selected, and each of the selection rates is different. More specifically, in the distribution table H5 for losing winnings, the selection rate for the weak SP reach A is relatively higher than that for the strong SP reach A. In the combined distribution table H7, on the contrary, the strong SP reach A has a higher selectivity than the strong SP reach A.

  Further, when paying attention to the distribution table H6 and H8 for the start of the change for winning the lost game, these are all selected in the case of “Special Figure 1 Lost C”, and are also used for the start of the change for the lost game change. The distribution table H6 is selected when “normal A” is selected, and the distribution variation table H8 when losing wins is combined with “normal B” is selected (alternate distribution when variation is started when winnings in FIG. 46). Table selection table). “Lose C” is a type of loss that is selected with a lower probability than “Lose A” and “Lose B” (see FIG. 44B). Here, referring to FIG. 48, both of the loss start winning change and distribution table H6 and H8 are selected from a plurality of common basic patterns (weak SP reach B or strong SP reach B). One basic pattern is selected, and each of the selection rates is different. Specifically, in the loss-winning-variation start-and-change distribution table H6, the weak SP reach B has a relatively higher selection rate than the strong SP reach B, and when the loss-winning change start In the combined distribution table H8, conversely, the strong SP reach B has a relatively higher selectivity than the strong SP reach B.

  This is the appearance of a reach production with a relatively high chance of winning a big hit when winning wins B and C during “normal B” compared to winning wins B and C during “normal A” This means that the rate increases, and in the present embodiment, the “normal B” is more likely to win the big win than the “normal A”, in other words, the “normal B” Opportunities to give players a sense of expectation of winning a big hit can be relatively increased. As a result, when the player is in the “normal B” state, the player can be given more sense of winning big wins, and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  However, when viewed from the player side, the internal gaming state may be clearly recognized as being “normal B” in the normal gaming state. In this case, it is considered that even if the appearance rate of the reach effect that the expectation of winning the big hit is relatively increased, the player's feeling of uplifting is not so much increased.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the above-described problem is solved by enabling the transition to “normal B” while keeping the internal gaming state secret. For example, if the gaming state is (I) small win B, C winning → “normal C (normal gaming state)” → reaching the normal number of transitions to normal A → “normal A (normal gaming state)” → small winning A winning → When transitioning to “normal B (normal game state)”, (II) 2R short-open latent probability change big win win → “normal C (latent state)” → reaching the normal number of transitions to normal A → “normal A ( The case of transition from “latent probability state)” → small win A winning → “normal B (latent state)” will be described as a representative example.

  The route won in the 2R short open latency change big hit in (II) above, even if it shifts to “normal B (normal game state)” via the route won in the small hits B and C in (I) above. Even if the game state is changed to “normal B (latency probability state)”, the player can grasp that the current game state is “normal B”. Since the internal gaming state is concealed due to the relationship between the behavior and the behavior of the 2R latent probability variation big hit game and the presence of the transition control to “normal C”, the current internal gaming state cannot be accurately grasped. . As a result, “normal B” in which the internal gaming state is unknown as shown in the above (I) and (II), compared to the case where the internal gaming state is clearly understood as being in “normal B” of the normal gaming state. When a reach production with a high degree of expectation for winning a big hit appears in the middle, the sense of expectation that “there may be a latent state at present, and this may be a big hit with this reach” increases. When the internal gaming state is concealed, providing a gaming state that increases the chances of giving a winning expectation to the big win by increasing the appearance rate of reach production with a high expectation degree of winning a big hit increases the fun of the game Above, it has significant significance.

(C) Fluctuation pattern determination process (steps S446 to S447)
Next, the variation pattern determination process (steps S446 to S447) will be described. After obtaining the fluctuation start command data 1 and the fluctuation pattern distribution table second hierarchy in the process of step S445, the CPU 201 obtains the fluctuation pattern random value 2 stored in the determination random number storage area of the RAM 203 (step S445). S446) Referring to the second hierarchy of the variation pattern distribution table, the “variation start command data 2” and the “variation time table” corresponding to the variation pattern random value 2 are acquired (step S447).

(T-12. Fluctuation pattern distribution table second layer: FIGS. 53 and 54)
With reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, the second hierarchy of the variation pattern distribution table will be described. FIG. 53 shows the second hierarchy of the hit fluctuation pattern distribution table selected by the winning start variation sharing distribution table, and FIG. 54 shows the loss variation pattern selected by the loss winning variation start distribution table. The distribution table 2nd hierarchy is shown.

  As shown in the figure, the second level of the hit variation pattern distribution table of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of hit variation pattern distribution table second layers AA1 to AA9. Includes a plurality of types of loss variation pattern distribution table second hierarchies HH1 to HH12. The second hierarchy of the variation pattern distribution table is mainly used for specifying individual variation patterns included in the variation pattern type determined in the winning variation combined distribution table at the time of winning.

  Each variation pattern distribution table second hierarchy includes a variation pattern random number value 2, a variation start command data 2, and a determination region (determination value) for determining a variation time table in association with each other. Specifically, the change start command data 2 and the change time table are determined depending on which determination value the change pattern random value 2 belongs to. In the figure, as in the case of the distribution table at the time of the start of variation when winning is already described (FIGS. 47 and 48), the determination value is omitted and only the selection rate is shown.

  When the “change start command data 2” is determined, the change pattern at the start of change, which is the specific content of the basic pattern, is determined. For example, if the content of the variation start command data 1 determined in the winning variation start / distribution allocation table is the variation pattern type “weak SP reach A”, it is determined in the second hierarchy of the variation pattern allocation table. The specific content of the “weak SP reach A”, that is, one of “weak SP reach A1 to weak SP reach A3” in the “weak SP reach A” type is determined.

  The “variation time table” includes “TIMTBL-A1 to TIMTBL-A21” determined in the second hierarchy of the hit variation pattern distribution table and the variation time table “determined in the second variation pattern distribution table”. A plurality of types of variation time tables of “TIMTBL-H1 to TIMTBL-H24” are included. When this variation time table is determined, the variation time of the special symbol is determined, and this variation time becomes the execution time of the current symbol variation display game (design game).

(Variation pattern related to special symbol 2)
Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following characteristic elements are provided for the special variation pattern (variation pattern on the special symbol 2 side) related to the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 operation holding ball). This will be described with reference to the winning variation changing allocation table selection table in FIG. 46, the lost variation changing start allocation distribution table in FIG. 48, and the lost variation pattern distribution table second hierarchy in FIG. To do.

  46. First, referring to the selection table for the change at the start of change at the time of winning in FIG. ~ “07H”), “Special figure 2 loss B” (same offset value “0AH”), and “Special figure 2 loss C” (same offset value “0BH”), “Normal A” and “Normal” In the case of “B” (fluctuation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) “01H” “02H”), only the distribution table H4 at the time of the start of the change for winning a loss is selected, and in the case of “normal C”, Only the share allocation table H9 at the start of fluctuation at the time of winning a win for a lose is selected.

  As for the distribution table H4 and H9 for variation start at the time of winning for the lost game, the distribution table H4 for variation start at the time of winning for the lost game only designates the “normal variation 3” type, and the combined use at the time of starting the variation at the time of lost game winning. The distribution table H9 designates only the “special normal variation” type (normal variation pattern type for normal C). In other words, the “normal A” to “normal C” state is “no electric support”, and the “normal fluctuation pattern” for a non-reach effect that does not go through the reach state in the case of a loss winning in this electric no support state. "Only the type" is specified. The specific variation pattern can be obtained by referring to FIG. 54 and referring to the loss variation pattern distribution table second hierarchy HH3 and HH9 determined by the distribution start variation distribution table H4 and H9 for loss. The variation pattern at the start of variation is “normal variation 3 s (variation time 3 seconds)” for “normal A” and “normal B”, and “special normal variation 10 s (variation time 10) for“ normal C ”. Sec) ". In the present embodiment, the “normal variation 3” type has a single “normal variation 3 s (variation time 3 seconds), and the“ special normal variation ”type has a single“ special normal variation 10 s (variation time 10 seconds). The present invention is not limited to this. Each variation type may include a plurality of types of normal variation patterns.

  In the present embodiment, as in “normal A” to “normal C”, in the case of a game state with a “no power support state”, the “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is established, and the special figure 2 operation is suspended. Prefetch determination for a sphere is prohibited.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal variation pattern is selected for all the variation patterns on the special symbol 2 side in the absence of the electric support, and the prefetch determination for the special symbol 2 operation holding ball is prohibited. The reason for this is as follows.

  For example, only three special figure 1 operation holding balls with normal fluctuation patterns are held, and in this state, there is a winning at the upper start port 34, and a pre-reading advance notice for the fourth special figure 1 operation holding ball is made. The case where the production has started will be described as a representative example (in this embodiment, whether or not the pre-reading notice production is performed is lottered on the condition that there is no reach variation pattern in the old operation holding ball, or the old operation holding is performed. If there is a reach variation pattern in the ball, whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is performed is selected by lottery, but the probability that the pre-reading notice effect is executable is determined to be zero). Here, the above-mentioned “fourth special figure 1 operation holding ball” which has been a target of the pre-reading notice effect will be referred to as “notice target holding ball”.

  In the state where the above-mentioned noticeable holding ball has not yet been digested, when the lower start opening 35 has won a prize and a special figure 2 operation holding ball is generated, the special fluctuation function will cause the special figure 2 operation holding ball generated later Digested. At this time, if the fluctuation pattern related to the special figure 2 actuated holding ball is determined to be a “latch with change fluctuation pattern”, the loss that has no relation to the pre-reading notice effect for the above-mentioned noticeable holding ball will be lost. No. “Reach production” is intervening, and the pre-reading notice production is cut off in the middle. As a result, there is a fear that the function of the pre-reading notice effect is not sufficiently exhibited, and the effect of the effect cannot be fully utilized.

  In view of the above problems, first, when the winning result in the “no power support” state is “lost”, only the “normal variation pattern” is designated as the variation pattern on the special symbol 2 side. Thereby, the said problem can be solved. However, with this alone, a series of 'pre-reading determination' processing related to the winning time processing is executed for the special figure 2 operation holding ball generated later, and the problem that the control load of the pre-reading notice effect increases still remains. End up.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, as described above, the “special figure 2 prefetch prohibition condition” is established in the state without the electric support, and the “special figure 1 prefetch prohibition” is in the state with the electric support. "Condition" is established, and the section (prefetch prohibition state) in which prefetch determination on the special symbol 1 side and special symbol 2 side is prohibited is switched according to the gaming state. Thereby, the control burden regarding the prefetch notice effect can be reduced. If the special figure 2 action holding ball that was generated later was a big hit (including a small hit), the “variable pattern with reach” was selected as the fluctuation pattern on the special symbol 2 side, and the above notice subject The “reach effect” will be intervened during the pre-reading notice for the holding ball, but in this case, it will be a big hit as it is, and it will not cause any disadvantage to the player, and the pre-reading notice will be broken. In such a case, since it is possible to add an unexpected performance such as winning a big hit, it is considered that there is no particular problem. In addition, if “variation pattern with reach” is selected as the fluctuation pattern on the special symbol 2 side during the pre-reading notice effect on the special symbol 1 side, a dedicated reach effect related to the pre-reading notice effect is generated. You may comprise so that it may be made.

  Further, during the “probable change state”, there is a possibility that the change pattern with reach may be selected for both of the change patterns on the special symbols 1 and 2 side (“Special Figure 2 Loss B (offset value after correction at the start of change“ 0AH ")" and "Special Figure 2 Loss C (same offset value" 0BH ")", there is a variation distribution table H11 at the start of variation for winning a loss for designating the "reaching during probability variation" of the variation variation pattern with reach. (See FIG. 48 and FIG. 54)) If a pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 2 operation holding ball is generated, a special figure 1 operation holding ball will be generated later. Even if the fluctuation pattern related to the action-holding ball in FIG. 1 is a “variation pattern with reach”, the existing special-purpose action-holding ball is preferentially digested sequentially by the function of the priority change function, Be shredded No, no particular problem. In other words, if the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 2 operation holding ball is being generated, there should be at least one special figure 2 operation holding ball. It is because it is not digested.

(About loss variation patterns that can be selected during "Normal C")
Further, the loss variation pattern selected during “normal C” in the present embodiment includes the following characteristic elements. Referring to the column of “Normal C” (variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) “02H”) in the winning variation combination allocation table selection table in FIG. 46, the operation holding ball is in “Normal C”. Regardless of the number, the distribution table H9, H10 for starting and changing the variation for winning a win is selected. However, the distribution start variation allocation table H10 for a lost game win is selected according to the type of the loss, and in the present embodiment, “Special Figure 1 Loss B” (offset value after variation start correction “08H”), and It is selected in the case of “Special Figure 1 Loss C” (same offset value “09H”). In addition, as described above, the losing winning change-and-change distribution table H9 designates only the “special normal change” type (normal C normal change pattern type). In general, even if there is no electric support, the number of balls that can be activated can be changed in a relatively short period of time. If there is a change in the number according to the number of active balls to be used, it is possible to select an effect time (design) for each symbol variation display game. The execution time of the variable display game can be changed, and various effects can be generated (as such a gaming state, “normal A” and “normal C” are used in this embodiment. (See FIG. 54 in particular)). However, if the effect time of the symbol variation display game is changed according to the number of suspended balls, the effect time of the symbol variation display game changes frequently in a short period of time, and it spans multiple symbol variation display games. Thus, it may be difficult to continuously develop productions that are closely related (for example, story-style productions tailored to a story).

  In addition, when the symbol variation display game of this time is started, the number of activated balls at the end and the number of activated balls at the end are likely to be different, and if the variation pattern of the special symbol changes according to the number of activated balls It is not possible to predict the performance time of the next symbol variation display game. In addition, when making the above narrative effect appear, it is conceivable to use a pre-reading notice effect. However, a continuous notice effect such as a pre-reading notice effect is a continuous notice effect that targets an existing active ball. Therefore, the number of times is limited up to the maximum number of reserved storage (in this embodiment, 4 times). That is, the problem is that, firstly, there is a possibility that the production time will change for each symbol variation display game, and secondly, the above-mentioned close relationship is exceeded beyond the maximum number of games of 4 times. The point that the production which it has cannot be shown is mentioned.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of the length of the production time as much as possible, a specific gaming state (usually C) in which the variation pattern is selected regardless of the number of the operation-pending balls is provided, and the specific gaming state By setting the number of times of continuation (number of symbol variation display games (number of variations of special symbols)) to a number exceeding at least the maximum number of reserved memories, it is possible to easily develop such a narrative style effect for a long period of time. I am doing so. In particular, “Normal C” in this embodiment works as a gaming state in which the jackpot lottery probability can be concealed, so that in such a gaming state, the expectation of a high probability state can be obtained over a relatively long number of games. Developing a narrative-like production is extremely effective in improving the fun of the game. In the case of ST machines, in order to leave the player with a high probability of expectation, if “normal C” is repeated S times and the specified ST number is T times, “maximum number of reserved memories (4 times) It is preferable to satisfy the relationship <S ≦ T ”. More preferably, “the maximum number of reserved memories (4 times) <S <T”. In the case of the above “maximum reserved storage number (4 times) <S <T”, “normal C” ends and “normal A” is shifted to before “normal ST” ends, but from “normal C” Even after shifting to “normal A”, the expectation of the high probability state remains until the above-mentioned prescribed number of STs is completed. The reason is that the player cannot accurately know the internal gaming state. Therefore, even if the transition from “normal C” to “normal A” in the low probability state is made, the player will enjoy the game with an expectation of the high probability state until the specified number of STs is completed. It becomes like this. As a result, it is possible to increase the operating rate of the gaming machine, rather than having a relationship of “maximum reserved storage number (4 times) <S = T”.

  In this embodiment, in the case of “Special Figure 1 Loss B” or “Special Figure 1 Loss C” in normal C, the “special reach” type of the variation pattern with reach (variation pattern type with reach for normal C) is set. It is selected (see the column of “variation start and change allocation table H10” in FIGS. 46, 48, and 54). However, in the case of a loss in “normal C”, a configuration with no reach variation pattern may be selected, and only a “special normal variation 10 s” that is a normal variation pattern may be selected. In this way, when a loss is won, only the “special normal fluctuation 10s” having the same fluctuation pattern is selected each time, regardless of the number of suspended balls and the type of loss. As a result, as long as the game continues to win, the game progresses while the execution time of the symbol variation display game for each time, that is, the production time has the same time width, so in developing the narrative-like production, Placed under active gaming conditions. Also, in the case of a big win, a specific performance (for example, special reach 1 to 3) specified by the hit fluctuation pattern can be generated. When a special effect such as an epilogue effect (in this case, an aspect of a reach effect based on special reach 1 to 3) occurs, a big win winning decision (may include a small win) can be notified. Become. In addition, the above “story-style production” is, for example, a “combat production (fighting production where the enemy falls when winning a big hit. Defeat production that receives an attack from the enemy when winning a win)” ”Or“ Storyline production (when the big hit is won, the final story production of the last story of the story, and when the loss is won, the story continues the story ”), Gives a predetermined command to the player every time the game is executed. “Direction effect (for example, with a button notice effect,“ Press the frame effect button 13 to defeat the enemy! ”) Achieved effect: When winning, it is not particularly limited as long as some story development is made, such as an instruction unachieved effect in which the enemy remains))).

(D) Special symbol variation time setting process (step S448)
Returning to the description of FIG. 19 again, the special symbol variation time setting process (S448) will be described next. After obtaining the variation time table in the process of step S447, the CPU 201 refers to the obtained variation time table and stores the variation time of the special symbol in the “special symbol accessory operation timer” (step S448). The “special symbol accessory operation timer” is one of timer management areas in the RAM 203 that manages timers related to game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a timer management area, there are a special symbol determination timer, which will be described later, in addition to the special symbol accessory operation timer.

(E) Fluctuation pattern designation command creation processing (step S449)
Next, based on the “variation start command data 1” acquired in the process of step S445 and the “variation start command data 2” acquired in the process of step S447, a “variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern at the start of the variation” "Is created (step S449).

  Then, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S450: variation pattern designation command transmission process). As a result, the special symbol variation pattern creation process is exited and the process proceeds to step S413 in FIG.

(C-2: List of change pattern designation commands: FIGS. 55 and 56)
55 and 56 show a list of variation pattern designation commands created by the variation pattern designation command creation processing in step S449. FIG. 55 shows a list of hit variation pattern designation commands, and FIG.

  The “variation pattern designation command” is one of the production control commands, and is composed of 2 bytes. The variation pattern designation command of this embodiment includes a plurality of types of commands, “variation patterns A1 to A21” as hit variation pattern designation commands and “variation patterns H1 to H24” as loss variation pattern designation commands. When this variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, the decorative design designation command is transmitted (step S415 in FIG. 15). Upon receiving these commands, the effect control unit 24 determines an effect that appears in the current symbol variation display game based on information included in each command, and performs an effect control process based on the effect. Thus, an effect during the symbol variation display game is realized.

  Next, with reference to the list of loss variation pattern designation commands in FIG. 56, the gaming state viewed from the viewpoint of the variation time defined for various variation patterns will be described.

  The normal variation pattern of the present embodiment includes “normal variation 12s (variation time 12 seconds)” (variation pattern H1) and “normal variation 8s (variation time 8) that can be selected during“ normal A ”or“ normal B ”. Second) "(variation pattern H2), and" normal variation 3s (variation time 3 seconds) "(variation pattern H3)," special normal variation (variation time 10 seconds) "(variation pattern) that can be selected during 'normal C' H17), and “normal fluctuation 2s during fluctuation (2 seconds of fluctuation)” (fluctuation pattern H21) that can be selected during the “probability change state”.

(D-1: High-speed fluctuation state)
Of these normal variation patterns, attention is paid to “normal variation 2s during probability variation”. This “normal variation 2s during probability change” is a variation pattern in which a relatively short variation time is defined, and in this embodiment, the variation pattern in which the shortest variation time is defined among all variation patterns. . Here, in the loss variation pattern in the “probability change state”, the “normal change 2s during probability change” that is a single change pattern is set, and the “winning loss A” has the highest winning probability among the loss types. This is the normal variation pattern selected. Therefore, in the case of the loss winning in the “probable change state”, a high-speed fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time width of the special symbol is “2 seconds” is selected with high probability. That is, during the probability variation state, the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game (the average time of the symbol variation display game per game, or the time of the symbol variation display game per unit time) is larger than that of other probability variation states. It is placed under a “high-speed fluctuation state” that becomes relatively short.

  Such “high-speed fluctuating state” is mainly useful in a gaming state in which importance is placed on the game characteristics such as “increase the average digestion speed of the game and increase the time efficiency regarding the progress of the game”. In particular, during the probabilistic state, the game state has been devised to improve the game digestion speed per unit time and make it easier to win big hits. Become. When placed under such a gaming state, there are many players who want to get a big hit faster than enjoying the production. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the “high-speed fluctuation state” is generated when the probability variation state is in effect. If the “short time state” is configured to be generated, the lottery lottery probability is in a low probability state, but the lottery number improvement state becomes “electric support support state + special symbol short time state”. Also in this case, the “high-speed fluctuation state” may be generated in the same manner as the “probability change state” described above.

(D-2: Low speed fluctuation state)
For the above "high-speed fluctuation state", multiple types of fluctuation patterns with relatively long fluctuation times such as "normal fluctuation 12s (fluctuation time 12 seconds)" and "normal fluctuation 8s (fluctuation time 8 seconds)" are selected. In a game state that is likely to be played, the game is placed under a “low-speed fluctuation state” in which the average digestion time of the symbol fluctuation display game is relatively long. Under such a “low speed fluctuation state”, the average digestion time of the symbol fluctuation display game is longer than that of the “high speed fluctuation state”, but instead, the production time can be made longer. It is useful in a gaming state where emphasis is placed on gameplay such as “enjoy”. In the gaming state where the probability of winning a big hit is low or the possibility is high, there are many players who want to enjoy the production while enjoying the production, contrary to the above-mentioned probability variation state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of “normal A” or “normal B”, the “low-speed fluctuation state” is generated.

(D-3: Quasi-constant velocity fluctuation state)
Further, in this embodiment, as in the case of “normal C”, regardless of the number of suspended balls, “special normal fluctuation 10 s (variation time 10 seconds)” is selected with a high probability at the time of loss, and each time A “quasi-constant speed variation state” is generated in which the digest time of the symbol variation display game is substantially constant. Under such a “quasi-constant speed variation state”, as described above, the execution time of the symbol variation display game for each time, that is, the performance time is almost constant, and the game proceeds multiple times (especially This is a special gaming state in which an effect having a close relationship (story-like effect of tailoring a story) can be generated across the symbol variation display game having a number greater than the maximum number of reserved memories. Even in the “probability change state”, the “normal change 2s during probability change” is selected with a high probability at the time of losing regardless of the number of suspended balls. I can say that. In the “normal C” and “probability change state” of the present embodiment, a “variation pattern with reach” having a variation time (direction time) longer than the “normal variation pattern” at the time of loss can be selected. A configuration in which no variation pattern is selected or a configuration in which the selection rate of the variation pattern with reach is extremely low may be employed. Also in this case, it becomes a “quasi-constant speed fluctuation state”, which is effective in generating the narrative effect.

(8-4. Special symbol variation processing: Fig. 20)
Next, the special symbol changing process (step S307) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol changing process (step S307) of FIG.

  In FIG. 20, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S451). If the special symbol accessory action timer is not zero (step S451: NO), the special symbol change time has not yet elapsed, that is, the special symbol is changing. Exit.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S451: YES), a “variation stop command” indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S451). S452). By this change stop command, the production control unit 24 grasps that the special symbol change display game has ended after the change time of the special symbol has elapsed, and stops and displays (decision display) the decorative symbol that is currently displayed in the change display. As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated along with the termination of the special symbol variation display game.

  Next, as a setting process at the time of stoppage of the special symbol fluctuation, the special symbol determination signal output time (for example, 100 ms) is stored in the special symbol determination timer of the RAM 203, and the fixed display time (for example, 500 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. ), The special symbol operation status is switched to “confirming (03H)” (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special symbol changing flag (step S453). Exit the special symbol change process. The “special symbol determination signal output time” is an extra time for securing the output time of the special symbol determination signal for notifying the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been determined and displayed. It is. The “determined display time” is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the special symbol change display is finished and the special symbol is stopped.

  When the process of step S453 is completed, the special symbol changing process is exited, the special symbol display data update process of step S309 of FIG. 9 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special symbol display process of step S60 of FIG. Proceed to the electric accessory management process.

(8-5. Special symbol confirmation time processing (variation stop processing): FIG. 21A and FIG. 21B)
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) will be described. 21A and 21B are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) of FIG.

  21A and 21B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S471). The “determined display time” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S453 in FIG. 20). Until the special symbol accessory action timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process during this special symbol confirmation time is terminated without doing anything.

  If the special symbol accessory action timer reaches zero (step S471: YES), the special symbol movement status is switched to “standby (01H)”, assuming that the current special symbol fluctuation display game is over (special symbol action). (01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the game state determination number (YJ) corresponding to the current game state is stored in the game state determination area of the RAM 203 (step S473).

  Next, the big hit determination flag is acquired, and the state of the big hit determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the big hit judgment flag is ON)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S474: = 5AH), various setting processes when the big hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S475). Here, as various setting processes (pre-start process of the big hit game) at the time of the big hit symbol stop, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the big hit determination flag, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the condition device operation flag, General power release extended state flag, normal symbol short state flag, normal symbol probable state flag, special symbol short state flag, special symbol probable state flag, special symbol short time counter, special symbol probable number counter, and special symbol variation count 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the counters, 00H (usually A is specified) is stored in the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), and the game state notification LED (not shown) is turned on / off. 00H is stored in the status notification LED output number, and the process during this special symbol confirmation time is exited. The “gaming state notification LED” is state notification means for notifying current game state information. The gaming state notification LED (state notification unit) of the present embodiment is used to notify whether or not the special symbol time-short state is set. The CPU 201 changes the notification mode of the game state notification LED (state notification means) according to the game state notification LED output number. For example, if the gaming state notification LED output number is “00H”, it means that the current state is not the special symbol short state (gaming state notification LED: off state (non-special symbol short state notification), and “01H”. Now, it is informed that it is in the special symbol short-time state (game state notification LED: lighting state (special symbol short-time state notification).

(When the big hit judgment flag is OFF)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then the small hit determination flag is acquired and the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S476). . When the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S476: ≠ 5AH), the process proceeds to step S478. When the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S476: = 5 AH), various setting processes when the small hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S477). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hit determination flag, and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit determination flag as various setting processes (small hit game start pre-processing) when the small hit symbol is stopped. When the various setting processes at the time of the small hit symbol stop are completed, the process proceeds to step S478.

  When the processing proceeds to step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining number of special symbol time reduction states) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol short time counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol short time counter is subtracted by 1 (step S479) as the digest of the current fluctuation number, and the special symbol short time counter after subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not there is (step S480).

  If the special symbol short-time counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), since the special symbol short-time state end count has not reached 70, the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol short-time counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), setting processing at the time short-term end is performed on the assumption that the special symbol short-time state end count has reached 70 (step S481). Here, 00H (OFF state) is changed for each of the utility power release extended state flag, the normal symbol time-short state flag, the normal symbol probability change state flag, and the special symbol time-short state flag as setting processing at the time-short-time end. 00H is stored in the pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and 00H (non-special symbol time-short state designation) is stored in the gaming status notification LED output number. As a result, from the next game, the player is placed in a state without power support.

  When the setting process at the time of short time end in step S481 is finished, a “short time end command” including end information (non-electric support state transition information) as a special symbol time reduction state is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S481). S482). This “short-time end command” is a kind of “game state designation command” for designating the current game state or notifying that the game state is to be transferred. Know that there is no support. In the present embodiment, when the transition from the electric support state to the no electric support state is the same as the transition from the probability change state to the normal A, the presentation control unit 24 receives this “short time end command”. For example, when starting the next decorative symbol variation display game, the background image (background effect) for “normal A effect mode” is switched to perform effect control processing under the effect mode, or as the launch position For example, an effect control process for causing a “launching position guidance effect (left-handed notification effect)” to be directed to aim at the leftward flow path 3b is performed.

  Next, when the processing proceeds to step S483, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST count) is zero (step S483).

  If the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488.

  If the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S484) as the current symbol variation variation digest, and the special symbol probability variation counter after the subtraction is subtracted. Is determined to be zero (step S485).

  If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the ST specified number of times (70 times) has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S487 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol probability variation counter after the subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), setting processing at the end of probability variation is performed on the assumption that the variation number of the special symbol has reached the ST specified number of times (step S486). Here, as the transition setting process to the normal gaming state at the end of the latent probability state or the probability changing state, the normal utility release extended state flag, the normal symbol short state flag, the normal symbol probable state flag, the special symbol short state flag, In addition, 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the special symbol probability changing state flags, 00H is stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and 00H (non-special symbol short-time state designation) is stored in the gaming state notification LED output number. To do. Thereby, from the next game, the jackpot lottery probability is placed from the high probability state to the low probability state. In the case of the latent state, the special symbol time counter is set to zero (see the game state transition preparation process in step S411 in FIG. 15 and FIG. 18 showing the details thereof). In the process, the end timing of the latent state is managed.

  When the setting process at the end of the probability change in step S486 is completed, the process proceeds to the process in step S487, and whether or not the special symbol variation number counter is zero, that is, the specified number of game state transitions (when transitioning to “normal B”: gaming state) It is determined whether or not the prescribed number of times of transition 100 times and “normal C” transition time: 15 times or 30 times) is zero (step S487).

  If the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S487: YES), the special symbol confirmation time is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S487: NO), the special symbol variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S488) as the digest of the current variation, and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not (step S489).

  If the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is not zero (step S489: NO), it is determined that the game state transition prescribed number has not been reached, and the processing during this special symbol confirmation time is terminated without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), the transition setting process to “normal A” is performed on the assumption that the special symbol variation count has reached the prescribed game state transition count (step S490). . Here, “00H (ordinary A designation)” is stored in the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) as the transition setting process to “normal A”. As a result, the selection condition for the variation pattern of the special symbol is changed. This step S490 process functions as a selection condition switching means for switching and controlling the selection condition of the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the establishment of a predetermined selection change condition. Thereby, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol in “normal A” is selected.

  Next, a “game state designation command” including “normal A” transition information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S491). With this “gaming state designation command”, the effect control unit 24 grasps that “normal B” or “normal C” ends and “normal A” starts from the next game. Thereby, when starting the decoration pattern variation display game to be performed next, the effect control unit 24 switches to the background image (background effect) for the “normal A effect mode” and performs the effect control process under the effect mode. Do.

  As described above, when the processing during the special symbol confirmation time is exited, the special symbol display data update processing in step S309 in FIG. 9 is performed, and then the special symbol management processing is exited, and the special electric equipment management in step 60 in FIG. Proceed to processing.

(9. Special electric equipment management process: FIG. 22)
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S60) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory management process in step S60.

  In FIG. 22, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hitting flag (step S501). When the small hitting flag is ON (= 5 AH) (step S501: = 5 AH), a small hit process is performed to control a series of operations of the special variable winning device 50 related to the small hit game (step S504). , Exit this special electric equipment management process. Details of the small hit process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S501: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S502: ≠ 5AH), in this case, it is not in the small hit game (step S501: ≠ 5AH) and is not in the big hit game. Exit the special electric property management process.

When the condition device operation flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S502: = 5AH),
Processing according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S503: special electric accessory status branching process). The “special symbol operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable winning device 50, and this status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

  In the special symbol operation status branch process in step S503, the special symbol operation status is “starting process (00H)”, “operation starting process (01H)”, “continuation determination (03H)”, “ending process (04H)”. Depending on the status value, the corresponding process is called and executed. Specifically, when the operation status of the special electric accessory is “starting process (00H)”, the big hit start process (step S505) is performed. In the case where the accessory actuating start process (step S506) is in operation (02H), the special electric accessory actuating process (step S507) is in effect. In the case where the accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) is “ending process (04H)”, the jackpot end process (step S509) is called and executed. By these processes, the operation of the special variable winning device 50 related to the big hit game is controlled.

  Here, “being started (00H)” indicates that the player is in a standby state before the jackpot game starts, and “operation start process (01H)” is that the player is in a standby state before starting the round game. “In operation (02H)” indicates that a round game is being executed, and “Continuing determination (03H)” indicates that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. “Big jackpot end process in progress (04H)” indicates that the big hit game is ending. When one of the processes in steps S505 to S509 is completed, the special electric accessory management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S61 of FIG.

  Hereinafter, the big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509) and the small hit game control process (step S504) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

<Big hit game control processing (steps S505 to S509)>
First, the big hit start process (step S505 in FIG. 22) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot start process.

(9-1. Big hit start processing: FIG. 23)
At the start of the big hit game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to “starting process (00H)” of the initial status value. Therefore, when a big hit is made, first, the big hit starting process is performed.

  In FIG. 23, first, the CPU 201 performs a setting process at the time of starting the big hit necessary for starting the big hit game (step S511: setting process at the time of starting the big hit). Here, as a setting process at the time of starting the big hit, 5 AH (ON state) is stored in the accessory continuous operating device operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “operation starting process (01H)” (special electric accessory) 01H is stored in the object operation status), and 01H is stored in the continuous number counter. The above-mentioned “actual accessory continuous actuating device operation flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the accessory continuous actuating device. This indicates that the round game can be continued, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the accessory continuous operation device is inactive (round game cannot be continued). The “continuous number counter” is a counter for storing the number of continuous executions of round games, that is, the current number of rounds. Since the continuous number counter here is “01H”, the current round number indicates the 1Rth.

  Next, a jackpot start setting table (not shown) is acquired (step S512), referring to the jackpot start setting table, the maximum number of rounds (specified number of rounds) according to the special symbol determination data (jacket type), The round display LED numbers are stored in the corresponding storage areas of the RAM 203, and the start interval time is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer (step S513: setting processing for each special symbol determination data).

(T-13. Big hit start setting table)
In the jackpot start setting table, “special symbol determination data” for identifying the jackpot type and “maximum number of rounds, start interval time, and round display LED number” are defined in association with each other. “Maximum number of rounds, start interval time, and round display LED” are determined according to the special symbol determination data. In the present embodiment, in the case of “2R short open probability variation big hit (special symbol determination data: 01H (see FIG. 42))”, the maximum number of rounds “2R”, start interval time “1000 ms”, round display LED number “03H” 'Is set. In the case of “10R long open probability change big hit (special symbol determination data: 02H (see FIG. 42))”, the maximum number of rounds “10R”, start interval time “10000 ms”, and round display LED number “01H” are set. The In the case of “15R long open probability change big hit (special symbol determination data: 03H (see FIG. 42))”, the maximum number of rounds “15R”, start interval time “10000 ms”, and round display LED number “02H” are set. The

  The above “start interval time” means that after the special symbol fixed display time elapses and the jackpot is confirmed (see step S471 in FIG. 21A, step S471 in FIG. 21A), the special variable winning device 50 is activated. , Which is a time interval that defines an interval in which the opening effect is performed (first effect time before the first round game is performed). The “round display LED number” is data for designating the notification mode of the round number display device 39b (round number display means). The CPU 201 determines the round display LED number according to the round display LED number (01H to 03H). The notification mode is changed. By designating the round display LED number, the maximum number of rounds (prescribed round number) of the current big hit game is displayed on the round number display device 39b.

  When the process of step S513 is completed, a “big hit start command” instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S514). The “hit start command” includes the current jackpot type information and the game status information at the time of the big win, and the production control unit 24 side performs a series of win production modes (opening production, It is also used when determining a round effect, a round end effect, an ending effect, etc.

  As described above, when the big hit starting process is completed, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S61 in FIG.

(9-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing: FIG. 24)
Next, the special electric accessory activation start process (step S506 in FIG. 22) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory operation start process.

  In FIG. 24, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S521). In this special symbol accessory operation timer, “interval time before starting round game” is set. As this interval time, in the first round (1R), the “start interval time” set in step S513 in FIG. 23 is monitored, but when passing through this step S521 after the 2R, “open” “Previous interval time (interval time set in step S575 of FIG. 29 described later)” is monitored. Until this special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S521: NO), this special electric accessory operation start processing is exited without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, if the interval time before opening (in the case of the first round, the starting interval time) has elapsed (step S521: YES), along with the opening operation of the big prize opening, The “big prize opening command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S522). This “big prize opening release command” includes round game start information (round production start instruction information) and current round number information, and when the production control unit 24 causes a round production corresponding to the number of rounds to appear. Used for

  Next, a special winning opening operating time setting table (not shown) is acquired (step S523), and a special winning opening operating time setting process is performed (step S524). In this special winning opening opening time setting process, the special winning opening operation time corresponding to the special symbol determination data and the current number of rounds is referred to the special winning opening operation time setting table. To store.

(T-14. Big winning opening operating time setting table)
In the above-mentioned special winning opening operation time setting table, the special winning opening opening operation time associated with the special symbol determination data and the current number of rounds is determined, and the special winning determination opening time is determined according to the special symbol determination data and the current number of rounds. The time for opening the big prize opening is determined. The big winning opening opening operation time of this embodiment is 10R long opening probability variation big hit (special symbol determination data “02H”: see FIG. 42) and 15R long opening probability variation big hit (special symbol judgment data “03H”: see FIG. 42). In this case, 29800 ms corresponding to the long open time as an initial value corresponds to the short open time as an initial value in the case of 2R short open latent big hit (special symbol determination data “01H”: see FIG. 42). 100 ms is set. In this embodiment, in the case of 10R long opening probability variation big hit, 29800 ms corresponding to the long opening time from 1R to 10R, and in the case of 15R long opening probability variation big hit, 29800 ms corresponding to the long opening time from 1R to 15R is 2R short. In the case of the large open probability, 100 ms corresponding to a short open time is set from 1R to 2R.

  Next, 00H is stored (cleared to zero) in the special winning opening winning number counter (step S525). The “large winning opening winning number counter” is a counter area provided in the RAM 203 for counting (storing) the number of winning balls of the large winning opening 50.

  Next, a special winning opening / closing operation setting process is performed (step S526). In the special winning opening / closing operation setting process, solenoid control data for the special winning opening solenoid 52c is created. The data set here is used in the solenoid management process (step S64) in FIG. This is used in the solenoid management process (step S64) of FIG. Details of the special winning opening / closing operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the special winning opening opening / closing operation setting process in step S526 is completed, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “in operation (02H)” (02H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status) (step S527).

  As described above, when the special electric accessory activation start process is completed, the special electric accessory management process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S61 in FIG.

(9-2-1. Grand prize opening / closing operation setting process: FIG. 25)
Next, the special winning opening / closing operation setting process (step S526 in FIG. 24) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing details of the special winning opening / closing operation setting processing in step S526.

  In FIG. 25, the CPU 201 first obtains a special winning opening / closing operation setting table selection table (see FIG. 58) (step S531), refers to the special winning opening / closing operation setting table selection table, and displays special symbol determination data and A prize winning opening / closing operation setting table (see FIG. 59) corresponding to the current number of rounds is acquired (step S532).

(T-15. Grand prize opening / closing operation setting table selection table: FIG. 58)
FIG. 58 shows the special winning opening opening operation setting table selection table. In the special winning opening opening operation setting table selection table of the present embodiment, the special winning opening opening / closing operation setting table (“OPENBL-D1”, FIG. 59) associated with the special symbol determination data and the current number of rounds. “OPENBL-D2”) is defined. Specifically, a special winning opening opening / closing operation setting table corresponding to the special symbol determination data and the current number of rounds is determined. Details of the above-described special winning opening / closing operation setting table will be described later with reference to FIG. 59 for convenience of explanation.

  Next, a special symbol accessory operation timer is acquired (step S533). In this special symbol accessory operation timer, the initial value of the special winning opening opening operation time is set (see step S524 of the special electric accessory start process in FIG. 25). That is, “29800 ms” or “100 ms” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here.

  Next, a solenoid setting process is performed (step S534). In this solenoid setting process, the solenoid control data for the special prize opening solenoid 52c is created mainly with reference to the special prize opening / closing operation setting table, and the special prize is obtained. Specify the mouth opening / closing pattern. Details of the solenoid setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As described above, when the solenoid process of step S534 is completed, the special electric accessory activation start process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S61 of FIG.

(9-2-2. Solenoid setting process: FIG. 26)
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing details of the solenoid setting process in step S534. In order to facilitate understanding of the solenoid setting process, first, the special winning opening / closing operation setting table acquired in step S532 will be described.

(T-16. Grand prize opening / closing operation setting table: FIG. 59)
FIG. 59 shows a special winning opening / closing operation setting table. FIG. 59 (a) shows an example of a big winning opening / closing operation setting table for big hits, and FIG. 59 (b) shows an example of a big winning opening / closing operation setting table for small hits.

(T-16-1: Big winning opening / closing operation setting table for jackpot: FIG. 59 (A))
With reference to FIG. 59 (a), the jackpot big winning opening / closing operation setting table will be described. The jackpot big winning opening opening / closing operation setting table of this embodiment includes a plurality of types of big winning big winning opening opening / closing operation setting tables “OPENBL-D1” and “OPENBL-D2”.

  In each of the jackpot big winning opening / closing operation setting tables, data necessary for designating the opening / closing operation pattern of the big winning opening relating to the big hit game is defined. Specifically, data for specifying the state of the special electric accessory actuating flag and data for specifying the state of the special winning opening release flag according to the special symbol accessory operation timer value are determined.

  The “special electric accessory actuating flag” is a flag used for confirming whether or not the special variable winning device 50 is operating. When the flag is ON (= 5 AH), When the variable winning device 50 is in operation, and the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special variable winning device 50 is inactive. In addition, during the period when the special electric accessory actuating flag is ON (= 5 AH) between round games, that is, during the period when the special variable prize winning device is in operation, the big prize opening is closed after the big prize opening is opened. After that, the remaining ball discharge time (first predetermined time: 1980 ms) is elapsed. On the other hand, the above-mentioned remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) elapses during the period in which the special electric accessory actuated flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) between round games, that is, the period during which the special variable prize winning device is not activated. It is a period in the interval time (second predetermined time: 20 ms) from when the next round game starts. If a special prize is generated at the special winning opening during the period when the special electric accessory activation flag is OFF (= 00H), it is regarded as an illegal prize, and predetermined error processing such as sounding an alarm sound from the speaker 46 (illegal prize) Detection error processing) is executed.

  The “big prize opening opening flag” is a flag used to create solenoid control data for the big prize opening solenoid 52c. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), solenoid control is performed. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), the excitation signal output stop (special prize opening is closed) is designated.

  The “timer value” shown in the figure indicates the timer value of the special symbol accessory operation timer acquired in step S533, which will be described later, and the “set value” corresponding to the timer value indicates the flag for opening the special prize opening. The setting value is shown. That is, when the special symbol accessory operation timer acquired in step S533 reaches the timer value shown in the figure, the “set value” corresponding to this is stored in the special winning opening release flag. For example, referring to “OPENBL-D2” shown in the figure, when the special symbol accessory operation timer is “29800 ms”, the corresponding set value is “5AH”, so “5AH” is stored in the special winning opening release flag. . Thereafter, “5AH” is stored in the special winning opening release flag until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches “0 ms”. When the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes “0 ms”, the corresponding set value is “00H”, and therefore “00H” is stored in the special winning opening release flag. The above set value is confirmed as solenoid control data in the solenoid management process (step S64) of FIG. 8, and when “5AH” is stored in the big prize opening opening flag, the big prize opening solenoid 52c. Thus, an excitation signal is output, thereby operating the open door 52b to open the special winning opening 50. On the other hand, when “00H” is stored in the special winning opening opening flag, the output of the excitation signal is stopped, whereby the open door 52b returns to the original position and the special winning opening 50 is closed. It is like that. Therefore, when “OPENBL-D2” is selected, if the maximum number of winnings is not reached after the big winning opening 50 is opened, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 is a long open time of 29800 ms. When “OPENBL-D1” is selected, if the maximum number of winnings is not reached after the big winning opening 50 is opened, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 is a short opening time of 100 ms.

(T-16-2: Big winning opening / closing operation setting table for small hits: FIG. 59 (b))
Next, with reference to FIG. 59 (b), the small winning big prize opening / closing operation setting table will be described. The big hit prize opening / closing operation setting table (OPENBL-D5) of the present embodiment defines data necessary for designating the opening pattern of the big prize opening relating to the small hit game. The configuration is the same as that of the jackpot big winning opening / closing operation setting table shown in FIG. This small winning big winning opening / closing operation setting table is acquired in the process of step S608 during the small hit process of FIG.

  The “OPENBL-D5” shown in the drawing is different from the above-mentioned “OPENBL-D1” and “OPENBL-D2” in the jackpot big winning opening opening / closing operation setting table regarding the setting of the big winning opening opening flag. In “OPENBL-D5”, “5AH” is “2200 ms”, “00H” is “2100 ms”, “5AH” is “100 ms”, and “00H” is “0 ms”. Is designated to be stored in the flag for opening the prize winning opening, the opening / closing operation of the prize winning opening 50 is opened for 100 ms, then closed for 2000 ms, again opened for 100 ms, and then closed. It becomes.

  Referring to the special winning opening / closing operation setting table selection table in FIG. 68, “OPENBL-D1” is selected in the 1R to 2R per 2R short-opening latent probability. Further, as described above, if “OPENBL-D1” does not reach the maximum number of winnings after the big winning opening 50 is opened, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 50 is 100 ms. However, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of winnings cannot be reached within the opening time, so the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening 50 during the 2R latent big hit game is opened for 100 ms, and then the round game The interval time between them (the remaining ball discharge time and the total interval time before release) is closed for 2000 ms, the next round game is started, the game is opened again for 100 ms, and then closed. As will be described later, both the 2R latent big hit game and the small hit game are provided with an opening effect time of 1000 ms and an ending effect time of 5000 ms. Thus, the behavior of the small hit game and the behavior of the 2R latent probability variation big hit game are substantially the same.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 26, the solenoid setting processing in step S534 will be described. In FIG. 26, first, the CPU 201 refers to the special winning opening / closing operation setting table acquired in step S532 of FIG. 25, and stores 5AH in the special electric accessory operation flag (step S541). Here, reference is made to the jackpot big winning opening / closing operation setting table OPENBL-D1 or PENTBL-D2 in FIG.

  Next, the special symbol accessory operation timer acquired in step S533 is compared with the timer value of the table with reference to the special winning opening / closing operation setting table (step S542), and the corresponding “set value” is set as the special winning opening. Stored in the release flag (step S543). Here, as described above, “29800 ms” or “100 ms”, which is the initial value of the special prize opening operation time, is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer acquired in step S533 (FIG. 25). (See step S524 of the special electric accessory starting process). That is, here, only the opening of the special winning opening 50 is designated (see the special winning opening release flag column in the special winning opening / closing operation setting table in FIG. 59).

  As described above, when the solenoid process is exited, the special electric accessory activation start process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S61 in FIG. The special winning opening / closing operation setting process (step S526) is used as a common processing module in the special winning opening / closing operation setting process (step S552) during the special electric accessory operating process of FIG. 27 described later. . As a result, the processing related to the opening / closing operation of the big prize opening can be made more efficient, which contributes to the reduction of the program amount and the memory amount.

(9-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessory: FIG. 27)
Next, the special electric accessory operating process (step S507 in FIG. 22) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory operating process.

  In FIG. 27, the CPU 201 first performs a large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process (step S551). In the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process, the number of winning balls to the large winning opening 50 is mainly counted, and it is confirmed whether or not the number of winning balls has reached the maximum winning number. The details of the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the big winning opening maximum winning number confirmation processing in step S551 is completed, the big winning opening opening / closing operation setting processing is performed (step S552). The special winning opening / closing operation setting process here is the same as the special winning opening / closing operation setting process (step S526) during the special electric accessory activation start process of FIG. Description is omitted.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S553). Since the special winning symbol action timer is set with the special winning opening operation time, the determination process of step S533 determines whether or not the special winning action operation time has elapsed. Become. Until the special symbol accessory operating timer becomes zero (step S553: NO), the special electric accessory operating process is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol feature action timer reaches zero (elapsed time for opening the big prize opening operation time) (step S553: YES), a "round end command" is produced, assuming that the big prize opening in this round game is closed. It transmits to the control part 24 (step S554). The “round end command” is used when the “round end effect” appears during the interval time between round games on the effect control unit 24 side.

  Next, various setting processes when the round game ends are performed (step S555). Here, as various setting processes at the end of the round game, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “Continuing judgment (03H)” (03H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and the special symbol accessory operation timer is set. The remaining ball discharge time (for example, 1980 ms) is stored.

  In this embodiment, the remaining ball discharge time set after each round game has the same time width (1980 ms), but is not limited thereto. Since the remaining ball discharge time is determined as an allowance time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening after the big prize opening is closed, the internal structure of the big prize opening (for example, the big prize opening sensor 52a). In consideration of the maximum path length until the game ball is detected), the maximum time required until the prize winning hole sensor 52a detects the game ball (or until the game ball is discharged to the outside from the prize winning opening) The expected time span is set. However, when the round game is controlled in a plurality of types of operation modes, different remaining ball discharge times may be set by paying attention to each operation mode. For example, paying attention to the fact that the winning rate at the grand prize opening is relatively low during a round game related to a short opening time, the game balls are frequently bitten by the open / close door 52b, and there are many game balls crowded in the big prize opening. Since it is not expected, the remaining ball discharge time may be a relatively short time width compared to during the round game related to the long open time.

  As described above, when the special electric accessory operating process is exited, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S61 in FIG.

(9-3-1. Large winning award maximum number-of-wins confirmation processing: FIG. 28)
Next, the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process (step S551 in FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing details of the special winning opening / closing operation setting process.

  In FIG. 28, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the special electric accessory operation flag (step S561). When the special electric accessory operating flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S561: ≠ 5AH), that is, when the special variable winning device 52 is not operating, the process exits the maximum winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process without doing anything. . Here, “the case where the special variable winning device 52 is not in operation” refers to the case during the interval time before the opening.

  When the special electric accessory actuating flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S561: = 5 AH), it is determined whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the special winning opening 50 (step S562).

  If no winning is detected at the big winning opening 50 (step S562: NO), the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process is exited without doing anything. On the other hand, when a winning is detected at the big winning opening 50 (step S562: YES), 1 is added to the big winning opening winning counter (step S563), and the process proceeds to step S564.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the extra winning opening winning counter after the addition has reached the maximum number of winning (for example, 9) (step S564). If the maximum number of winnings has not been reached (step S565: NO), nothing is done and the large winning opening maximum winning number confirming process is exited.

  On the other hand, when the maximum number of winnings has been reached (step S564: YES), the special symbol accessory operation timer is cleared (step S566). When the maximum number of winnings has been reached, the special symbol accessory operation timer is cleared, so that the timer value when the special symbol accessory operation timer is acquired during the large winning opening / closing operation setting processing in the subsequent step S552 is zero. (See step S533 in FIG. 25), and “00H” is stored in the big winning opening opening flag in the solenoid setting process to be executed next (see steps S542 to S543 in FIG. 26). The open large winning opening 50 is closed with the fact that it has reached.

  As described above, when the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process is terminated, the process proceeds to the large winning opening / closing operation setting process in step S552 of FIG.

(9-4. Special Electric Goods Operation Continuation Determination Process: FIG. 29)
Next, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508 in FIG. 22) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process.

  In FIG. 29, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S571). In this special symbol accessory operation timer, since the remaining ball discharge time after closing the big prize opening is set (see step S555 in FIG. 27), in the determination processing of step S571, the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. It will be determined whether or not. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S5571: NO), the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is terminated without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (remaining ball discharge time has elapsed) (step S571: YES), the continuous number counter is acquired and the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of specified rounds. It is determined whether or not (step S572).

  If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached (step S572: NO), the processing at the later-described steps S573 to S576 (round continuation processing) is performed as processing when the round game is continued. However, when the maximum number of rounds has been reached (step S572: YES), processing at steps S577 to S580 (round continuation end processing) is performed as processing at the time of ending the round game.

(9-4-1. Round continuation processing: steps S573 to S576)
If the current number of rounds has not reached the maximum number of rounds (step S572: NO), the processing route of steps S573 to S576 is entered.

  First, in the process of step S573, 1 is added (+1) to the continuous number counter (step S573).

  Next, a special electric accessory end interval setting table (not shown) is acquired (step S574). With reference to the special electric accessory end interval setting table, the special symbol determination data and the continuous counter after the addition are obtained. The corresponding “interval before opening” is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer (step S575).

(T-17. Special electric accessory end interval setting table)
The pre-release interval time associated with the special symbol determination data and the continuous number counter is defined in the special electric accessory end interval setting table. Specifically, the interval time before release is determined according to the special symbol determination data and the current value of the continuous number counter (the continuous number counter value after the addition processing in step S573). In the present embodiment, the interval time before opening set after each round game has the same time width (20 ms). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the interval time before opening set after one round game may be different from the interval time before opening set after another round game.

  During the interval before opening, the special electric accessory operation flag is set to the OFF state (= 00H) in the process of step S576 described later. Accordingly, the pre-opening interval time is a large winning opening prize invalid period in which the winning at the big winning opening is invalid (an illegal winning monitoring period during the big hit). The interval time before opening is not particularly limited, but as long as it is provided as an interval time between round games including the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms in this embodiment), this time is extremely long, for example, before the opening If the interval time is about several seconds, the waiting time between round games increases, and the player feels bothersome. In particular, in a big hit game with a maximum number of rounds of 15R, the total waiting time between round games only takes several tens of seconds to nearly one minute, which undesirably prolongs the big hit game period.

  Therefore, the interval time before opening in this embodiment is set to a short time of 20 ms. This is because when the game ball actually enters the winning opening and the ON signal of the winning detection switch is output, the output time (signal duration) is the longest although the rolling time of the winning ball is long or short. This is in consideration of about 20 ms. By setting an interval time before opening, goto acts (for example, goto acts that aim to over-win prizes using plastic plates or piano wires (selgoto), etc. to the big prize opening) It is expected that the ON signal from the big winning opening sensor 52a is frequently output when there is an illegal continuous winning due to a goto action that is activated to aim for excessive winning. Therefore, it is considered that there is no problem in monitoring illegal winnings between round games even if the interval time before opening is set to about 20 ms which is a proper ON signal signal duration. Preferably, it is considered that it is easier to detect fraud in the case of a longer time than that, but in consideration of the waiting time between round games, the interval time before opening is in the range of about 20 ms to several hundred ms. It is considered appropriate to set in However, the remaining ball discharge time may be set to a relatively short time depending on the form of the special winning opening (internal structure or the like). In this case, “remaining ball discharge time ≦ interval time before opening” may be set. For example, when the interval time between round games is set to 2000 ms, “the remaining ball discharge time is 1000 ms and the interval time before release is 1000 ms” or “the remaining ball discharge time is 500 ms and the interval time before release is 1500 ms”. May be.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 29 again, when the process of step S575 is completed, various setting processes for continuing the round are performed (step S576). Here, as a setting process for starting the next round game after the end of the current round game, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special electric accessory operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is set to “operation start process”. “Middle (01H)” (02H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status).

  When the above steps S573 to S576 (round continuation process) are finished, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S61 in FIG.

(9-4-2. Round continuation termination process: steps S577 to S580)
When the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds (step S572: YES), the processing route of steps S577 to S580 is entered.

  First, in the process of step S577, an accessory continuous operation device operation end interval setting table (not shown) is acquired (step S577), and the special symbol determination data is referred to with reference to the accessory continuous operation device operation end interval setting table. And “end interval time” corresponding to the added continuous number counter is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer (step S578).

(T-18. Actor continuous operation device operation end interval setting table)
In the above-mentioned accessory continuous operation device operation end interval setting table, special symbol determination data and end interval time are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the end interval time is determined according to the special symbol determination data. It is like that. In the present embodiment, the end interval time is “5000 ms” in the case of “2R short open probability variable big hit (special symbol determination data: 01H)”, and “10R long open probability variable big hit (special symbol determination data: 02H)”. In the case of “6000 ms”, “10000 ms” is set in the case of “15R long open probability variation big hit (special symbol determination data“ 03H ”)”.

  The above “end interval time” is an interval section from the end of the round game of the final round to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed, and defines the section where the ending effect is performed. Refers to the time span. During this “end interval time”, the special electric accessory operation flag is set to the OFF state (= 00H) in the process of step S579 described later. Accordingly, during the end interval time, as in the interval time before opening, it becomes a large winning opening prize invalid period in which winning to the big winning opening is invalidated.

  When the process of step S578 is completed, various setting processes at the end of the round are performed (step S579). Here, as the setting process when reaching the maximum round, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special electric accessory operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “ending process (04H)” (special electric accessory) 04H is stored in the operation status).

  Next, a “big hit end command” instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S580). The “hit end command” includes the current jackpot type information and game state information at the time of winning the big hit, and is also used when determining the effect mode after the big hit game on the effect control unit 24 side. Therefore, this “big hit end command” also serves as a game state designation command. The effect control unit 24 determines the effect mode based on the information included in the jackpot end command so that the game state after the end of the jackpot can be consistent with the effect mode related to the game state. It has become.

  As described above, when the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is terminated, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S61 in FIG.

(9-5. Big hit end processing: FIG. 30)
Next, the big hit ending process (step S509 in FIG. 22) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit end process.

  In FIG. 30, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S591). Since the above-described end interval time is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here, it is determined whether or not the end interval time has elapsed in the determination process of step S591. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S591: NO), the jackpot end process is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (the end interval time has elapsed) (step S591: YES), the value of each transition state buffer is stored in each state flag as part of various settings at the time of jackpot end ( Step S592). Specifically, each value of the transition state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process in step S411 (see step S411 in FIG. 15, see FIG. 18 showing the details) during the special symbol variation start process is used as the game state. To specify the utility power open extended state flag, normal symbol short state flag, normal symbol probable state flag, special symbol short state flag, special symbol probable state flag, special symbol short time counter, special symbol probable number counter, It is stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number and the special symbol variation counter. Thereby, the gaming state after the big hit game is specified.

  Subsequently, various setting processes at the end of the big hit are performed (step S593). Here, as various data used during the big hit game control process, the condition device operation flag, the accessory continuous operation device operation flag, the continuous number counter, the maximum number of rounds, the normal electrical equipment release extended state buffer, the normal symbol time transition State buffer, normal symbol probability change state buffer, special symbol short state transition state buffer, special symbol probability change transition state buffer, special symbol short time counter buffer, special symbol probability variable number counter buffer, fluctuation pattern distribution designation number buffer, special figure variation The number counter buffer, the round display LED number, and the game state determination number (YJ) are each cleared (00H is stored), and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “starting processing (00H)” (special electric accessory operation) 00H is stored in the status).

  In the process of step S593, the special symbol determination data used in the current jackpot game is not cleared, but the special symbol determination data is not shown in FIG. 15 after the current jackpot game ends. When the special symbol creation process in step S412 during the special symbol variation start process is performed, there is no problem because new special symbol determination data is overwritten in the RAM 203 (special symbol determination data storage area). In this way, the amount of program required to clear the special symbol determination data at the end of the big hit game can be reduced. Of course, if necessary due to processing, the special symbol determination data is cleared in the processing of step S593, and when the new special symbol determination data is generated, the generated special symbol determination data is stored in the RAM 203. You may store in (special symbol determination data storage area). Each transition state buffer may be configured not to clear the value of each transition state buffer in the process of step S593. In this case, after the current big hit game ends, when the game state transition preparation process of step S411 in the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 15 is performed, a process of overwriting the new transition state buffer value may be performed. This is because each transition state buffer is only used in the process of step S592. In this way, the amount of program required to clear each transition state buffer at the end of the big hit game can be reduced.

  Next, a game state notification information update process for updating the game state notification information is performed (step S594). In this process, it is confirmed whether the special symbol time reduction state flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) or OFF state (≠ 5 AH), and in the case of the ON state, the data for lighting the game state notification LED, specifically, the game 01H is stored in the status notification LED output number.

  When the jackpot ending process is completed, a series of control processes related to the jackpot game is completed. After exiting the big hit end process, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S61 in FIG.

<Small hit game control processing>
(9-6. Small hit processing: FIG. 31)
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the small hit game control process (step S504 in FIG. 22) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing details of the small hit processing.

  In FIG. 31, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the operation status of the special electric accessory is “in operation (02H)” (step S601).

  If the special electric accessory operation status is not “active (02H)” (step S601: ≠ 02H), the process proceeds to step S603. When the operation status of the special electric accessory is “in operation (02H)” (step S601: = 02H), after performing the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process (step S602), the process proceeds to step S603. Note that the processing for confirming the maximum winning prize amount at the step S602 described above is the same as the processing for confirming the maximum winning prize amount at the special winning combination operation (step S551) in FIG. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  When the processing proceeds to step S603, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S603). Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S603: NO), the process proceeds to step S607.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S603: YES), a small hit medium command transmission process is performed (step S604). In the small hit command transmission process, an effect control command based on the special electric accessory operation status is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Specifically, when the special electric accessory operation status is in the start process (00H), the “small hit start command” instructing the start of the opening effect is displayed. If the “small hit end command” instructing the start of the production is other than these, the process is terminated without transmitting anything. The “small hit end command” includes the current small hit type information and the game state information at the time of winning the small hit, and the effect control unit 24 side also determines the effect mode after the small hit game. Used. Therefore, this “small hit end command” also serves as a gaming state designation command. The effect control unit 24 determines the effect mode after the end of the small hit game based on the information included in the small hit end command, thereby matching the game state after the end of the small hit game and the effect mode related to the game state. You can take sex.

  When the small hitting medium command transmission process of step S604 is completed, a process for each special electric accessory operation status is performed (step S605). In the special electric accessory operation status-specific processing, processing according to the special electric accessory operation status is performed. Details of the special electric accessory operation status processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing according to the special electric accessory operation status in step S605 is completed, a small hit game state transition preparation process is performed (step S606). In the small hit game state transition preparation process, a setting process necessary for designating the game state after the small hit game is performed as a setting for shifting the game state. Based on the data set here, the gaming state after the small hit game is specified. Details of the small hit game state transition preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the hit game state transition preparation process in step S605 is completed, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory operation status is “in operation (02H)” (step S607).

  When the operation status of the special electric accessory is not “operating (02H)” (step S607: ≠ 02H), the small hit process is exited without doing anything.

  When the special electric accessory operation status is “operating (02H)” (step S607: = 02H), the small winning big winning opening opening / closing operation setting table of FIG. 59 (b) already described is acquired (step S608). Then, a special symbol accessory operation timer is acquired (step S609).

  Next, solenoid setting processing is performed (step S610). Since this solenoid setting process is the same as the solenoid setting process in step S534 during the special prize opening / closing operation setting process in the special electric accessory operation starting process of FIG. Description is omitted. In the solenoid setting process in step S610, the state of the special electric accessory actuating flag and the state of the special winning opening opening flag based on the small winning large winning opening opening / closing operation setting table (FIG. 59 (b)). It is specified.

  When the solenoid process of step S609 is completed as described above, the small hit process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S61 of FIG.

(9-6-1. Processing by operation status of special electric accessory: FIG. 32)
Next, the process according to the special electric accessory operation status (step S605 in FIG. 31) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory operation status-specific process (step S605).

  In FIG. 32, the CPU 201 first performs a special electric accessory operation status branch process (step S611). In the special electric accessory operation status branching process, depending on whether the special electric accessory operation status is “starting process (00H) to finishing process (06H)”, the corresponding process is called and executed. To do. Specifically, when the operation status of the special electric accessory is “starting process (00H)”, the small hit start process (step S612) is performed, and when the operation status is “operation starting process (01H)”, the small hit special electric combination is performed. The physical operation start processing (step S613) is performed. When “operating (03H)”, the small hit special electric accessory operating processing (step S614) is performed. When “continuation determination is being performed (04H)”, small hit continuation determination is performed. If the process (step S615) is “ending process (04H)”, the small hitting end process (S616) is called and executed. By these processes, the operation of the special variable winning device 50 related to the small hit game is controlled.

(9-6-1 (a). Small hit start process: Step S612)
At the start of the small hit game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to the initial status value “starting process (00H)”. Therefore, when a small hit is made, first, the small hit start process of step S612 is performed.

  In FIG. 32, the CPU 201 first performs a setting process required when starting a small hit game (step S612: small hit start process). Here, as the setting process at the start of the small hit, “pre-operation interval time” is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “operation start processing (01H)” (special As a result, 01H is stored in the electric accessory operation status). Thus, the small hit process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S607. The above “pre-operation interval time” means that after the special symbol fixed display time elapses and the jackpot is fixed (see step S471 in FIG. 21A in step S453 in FIG. 20), the special variable winning device 50 is activated. This is an interval section, and indicates a time width that defines a section in which the opening effect is performed. The pre-operation interval time is “1000 ms”, which is the same as the start interval time per 2R short open latent probability.

(9-6-1 (b). Small hit special electric accessory operation start processing: step S613)
Next, the small hit special electric accessory operation start process (step S613) will be described. This small hit special electric accessory operation start processing has entered the special electric accessory operation status processing after the pre-operation interval time set in the processing of step S612 has elapsed (step S603: YES in FIG. 31). (In this case, the operation status of the special electric accessory is “being activated (01H)” (see step S612)).

  In this small hit special electric accessory activation start processing, 00H is stored in the big prize winning prize counter (zero clear), and the “large winning opening operating time (2200 ms)” is stored in the special symbol accessory operating timer. The accessory operation status is switched to “in operation (02H)” (02H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). It should be noted that the maximum winning number has been reached in the period until the special winning symbol operating timer reaches zero after the special winning opening operating time (2200 ms) elapses or in the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation processing in step S602. Until the determination is made (step S602, step S603: NO, step S607: = in operation (02H)), the processing of steps S608 to S610 is performed, and the small winning big prize opening / closing in FIG. Based on the operation setting table (OPENBL-D5), the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 50 is controlled.

(9-6-1 (c). Small hit special electric accessory in operation: Step S614)
Next, the small hit special electric accessory operating process (step S614) will be described. The small hit special electric accessory operating process is performed after the special winning opening operating time set in the process of step S613 has elapsed (step S603: FIG. 31: YES), and the special electric combination is performed. This is a case where the processing according to the object operation status is entered (in this case, the operation status of the special electric agent operation is “operating (02H)” (see step S613)).

  In this small hit special electric accessory operating process, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special winning opening release flag, the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric accessory is stored. The operation status is switched to “Continuing judgment (03H)” (03H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status).

(9-6-1 (d). Small hit continuation determination process: Step S615)
Next, the small hit continuation determination process (step S615) will be described. This small hit continuation determination process is a case where the remaining ball discharge time set in the process of step S614 has elapsed (step S603: FIG. 31: YES), and the process by special electric accessory operation status is started ( In this case, the special electric accessory operation status is “continuing determination (03H)” (see step S614)).

  In this small hit continuation determination process, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special electric accessory activation flag, “small hit end interval time (5000 ms)” is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric accessory operation is performed. The status is switched to “ending process (04H)” (04H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). Here, the “small hit end interval time” is defined as an interval section in which the ending effect is performed until the small hit game ends after the winning prize 50 is closed and the remaining ball discharge time elapses. Refers to the time span. The small hit end interval time is “5000 ms”, which is the same as the end interval time per 2R short-open latent probability.

(9-6-1 (e). Small hit end processing: Step S616)
Next, the small hit end process (step S616) will be described. This small hitting end process is a case where the small hitting end interval time set in the process of step S615 has elapsed (step S603: FIG. 31: YES), and the processing by special electric accessory operation status is started ( In this case, the special electric accessory operation status is “ending process (04H)” (see step S615)).

  In the small hitting end process, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hitting flag as various setting processes at the end of the small hitting game, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “starting process (00H)” ( 00H is stored in the operation status of the special electric accessory.

  After finishing any one of the above steps S612 to S616, the process proceeds to the small hit game state transition preparation process of step S606 of FIG.

(9-6-2. Small-hit gaming state transition preparation process: FIG. 33)
Next, the small hit game state transition preparation process (step S606 in FIG. 31) will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing details of the small hit game state transition preparation process.

  In FIG. 33, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the operation status of the special electric accessory is “being activated (01H)” (step S621). If the special electric accessory operation status is not “operation start process in progress (01H)” (step S621: ≠ operation start process in progress (01H)), nothing is done and the game state transition preparation process at the time of small hit is exited. The process proceeds to step S607 in step 31.

  Here, in the case where the small hit is won, when the processing according to the special electric accessory operation status (step S605) of FIG. 31 is entered for the first time, the small hit starting process of step S612 is performed. The status is set to “operation starting process (01H)”. In this state, when the small hit game state transition preparation process is performed, the determination result of step S621 is “YES”, and the processes of steps S622 to S625 are performed. Thereafter, the pre-operation interval time elapses (step S603 in FIG. 31: YES), and the special electric accessory operation status processing is again entered (step S605), so that the small hit special electric accessory operation start processing in step S613 is performed. In this case, the operation status of the special electric accessory is switched from “being activated (01H)” to “being activated (02H)”. That is, the processing of steps S622 to S625 of the game state transition preparation process at the time of a small hit is performed when the small hit process of FIG. 31 is first passed when the small hit is won.

  When the operation status of the special electric accessory is “operation start process in progress (01H)” (step S621: = operation start process in progress (01H)), the state of the special symbol short-time state flag is then determined (step S622).

  If the special symbol short state flag is ON (= 5AH) (step S622: = 5AH), nothing is done and the small hit game state transition preparation process is skipped and the process proceeds to step S607 in FIG. In the present embodiment, the special symbol time reduction state flag is in the ON state in the “probability change state” (see FIG. 51). Therefore, if a small hit is won during the probable change state, the processing of steps S623 to S625, which will be described later, is not performed, and the game state transition preparation process is skipped without doing anything. There is no change in the game state at the time of winning and the game state after the small hit game.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol short time state flag is in the OFF state (≠ 5AH) (step S622: ≠ 5AH), the process proceeds to step S623, and a small hit game state transition table selection table is acquired (step S623).

Next, referring to the acquired gaming state transition table selection table, a gaming state transition table for small hits according to the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the small hitting type (special symbol determination data) is acquired (step S624). .
(T-18. Game state transition table selection table for small hits: FIG. 60)
FIG. 60 shows a game state transition table selection table for small hits. The small hit gaming state transition table selection table of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of gaming state transition tables ("JTTBL-S1" to "JTTBL-" associated with the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the special symbol determination data. S3 ": Refer to FIG. 61 described later). Specifically, based on the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the special symbol determination data, one of the small hitting game state transition tables is determined from among a plurality of types of small hitting game state transition tables. It has become.

(T-19. Game state transition table for small hits: FIG. 61)
FIG. 61 shows the above-described gaming state transition table for small hits. The game state transition table for small hits of this embodiment includes “JTTBL-S1” to “JTTBL-S3”. In these small hit gaming state transition tables, data to be stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area and the special symbol variation number counter are defined as data for designating the gaming state to be shifted after the small hit game. It has been. When the data values designated by these gaming state transition tables are stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area and the special symbol variation number counter, the gaming state after the small hit game is determined. Among these game state transition tables, “JTTBL-S1” is “normal B”, “JTTBL-S2” is “normal C (the number of prescribed game state transitions 15 times)”, and “JTTBL-S3” is “normal C”. This is a gaming state transition table for shifting to (game state transition prescribed number of times 30).

  Returning to the description of FIG. 33 again, when the processing of step S624 is completed, the variation pattern allocation designation number and the special symbol variation number counter are stored with reference to the acquired gaming state transition table for small hits (step S625: small Winning game state transition setting process).

  As described above, when the small hit game state transition preparation process is completed, the process proceeds to the determination process in step S607 of FIG.

<Processing on the production control unit side: FIGS. 34 to 39>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 39, an effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described. The processing on the side of the effect control unit 24 mainly includes a predetermined main process (effect control side main process: FIG. 34) and a timer interrupt process (effect control side timer interrupt process: activated by a scheduled interruption from the CTC). 35).

<11. Production control side main processing: FIG. 34>
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing main processing on the production control unit side (production control side main processing). The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG. 34 when the gaming machine main body is turned on from the outside.

  In the main process on the effect control side, the CPU 241 first performs a necessary initial setting process before starting the game operation (step S71). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, moving object starting point return processing, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of CPU internal register values including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

  When the initial setting process of step S71 is completed, the main loop process of steps S73 to S78 is performed every predetermined time as the process during normal operation, and otherwise the effect soft random number update process of step S80 is repeatedly performed.

  In the processing of step S72, the CPU 241 refers to the main loop update cycle counter value and determines whether or not the main loop update cycle that triggers the execution of the main loop processing has come (step S72). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that is updated in a main loop update process (step S96 in FIG. 36) during an effect control side timer interrupt process described later. In the present embodiment, the main loop process is performed every 16 ms. Until this main loop update period arrives (step S72: NO), various effect random numbers for lottery are updated (step S79: various effect soft random number update processing).

  When the main loop update period has arrived (step S72: YES), the CPU 241 performs a received command analysis process (step S73). In this received command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer. If an effect control command is stored, this command is read, and an effect control process corresponding to the read effect control command is read. I do. This effect control command includes the already described hold addition command, hold subtraction command, variation pattern designation command, decorative symbol designation command, variation stop command, and the like. For example, when a variation pattern designation command is received and stored in the reception buffer, in the command analysis process, variation pattern information included in the variation pattern designation command (variation time of special symbol, winning type, and variation start time One or a plurality of types of effect patterns are determined based on information such as fluctuation patterns) and the current number of activated balls. The effect pattern determined here works as a “part effect” as an element constituting the effect scenario.

  Subsequently, a time schedule is determined as to how long the determined production pattern (part production) is to be displayed at what timing and with what production time width, thereby creating a production scenario. Then, the production scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. Various production patterns (part production) incorporated in this production scenario are developed one after another or simultaneously, thereby realizing an “production scenario” in a broad sense. When the “button notice effect” is incorporated in the determined effect scenario, the “non-operation effect scenario” when the frame effect button 13 is not operated is constructed as a basic effect scenario. When the frame effect button 13 is operated while the button notice effect is being executed, the non-operation effect scenario needs to be replaced and changed to the “operation effect scenario” when the frame effect button 13 is operated. Such a process relating to the scenario change is performed in a “scenario update process” in step S74 described below.

  When the received command analysis process in step S73 is completed, a scenario update process is performed (step S74). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer necessary for execution of the production pattern are updated. A typical example of the timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. For example, the time within the variation period (decoration symbol variation period) in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed is within the same period as the variation period (special symbol variation period) in which the special symbol is variably displayed. On this axis, a time schedule for what kind of production pattern is made to appear in the production means with what time width is managed by this timer. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in an LED data update process (step S75) and an effect agent control data update process (step S77) described later. Here, this production scenario timer is monitored, and when the production time of one production comes, the sound data for the speaker 46 and the liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in the designated area of the RAM 243, respectively. . The LED data for the optical display device is created by an LED data update process (step S75) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created by an after-mentioned effect actor control data update process (step 77). The

  In the scenario update process, the basic effect scenario determined in the above-described received command analysis process (step S73) may be rewritten as necessary. As described above, when the “button notice effect” is incorporated in the basic effect scenario, it is necessary to change to an operation effect scenario different from the current non-operation notice effect scenario. Here, when it is confirmed that the frame effect button 13 is operated during the button notice effect, the operation effect scenario is changed (for example, the parts effect is rearranged), and the changed effect scenario data is set as the scenario setting. Reset to area.

  Next, LED data update processing is performed (step S75). In this LED data update process, LED data for a light display device such as a decorative lamp unit 45 or an LED is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer, and stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. The data created here is used in an effect LED management process (step S95 in FIG. 36) during a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, sound output processing is performed (step S76). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process in step S74 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, a sound effect is output from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit (sound source LSI). Thereby, the sound production according to the production scenario is realized.

  Next, a production accessory control data update process is performed (step S77). In the effect accessory control data update process, motor control data for the movable object accessory is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer. The data created here is used in a director action operation management process (step S94 in FIG. 36) during a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, noise countermeasure management processing for monitoring malfunction of the sound source LSI or the like is performed (step S78). If the program goes into a runaway state due to a malfunction, the watchdog timer expires and the CPU is automatically reset to recover from the runaway state. Thereby, the main loop process is terminated, and the effect soft random number update process in step S80 is performed until the next main loop update period comes.

(12. Command reception interrupt processing: FIG. 35)
Next, command reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing on the effect control side. This command reception interrupt process is executed with higher priority than an effect control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 36) described later when an effect control command is received from the main control unit 20.

  First, when an interruption based on a strobe signal from the main control unit 20 occurs during execution of the main process shown in FIG. 34, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S81). The received effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243 (step S82), and the saved register contents are restored (step S83). Thereby, the command reception interrupt process is ended, the process returns to the effect control unit side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until an interrupt based on the next strobe signal is generated. As described above, when various effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 are received, this command reception interrupt process is executed, and when the effect control command is received, the command is stored in the command reception buffer. Is done.

(13. Production control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 36)
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the timer interrupt process on the production control side will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the effect control-side timer interrupt process. This production control side timer interruption process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 1 ms) from the CTC, and is executed by interruption during execution of the production control side main process.

  In FIG. 36, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S91), and then performs an effect button input management process (step S92). In this effect button input management process, whether or not an operation (ON operation) detection signal is input from the frame effect button 13 is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243. To store. This information is used for the button notice effect.

  Next, a liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S93). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S74) in the effect control side main process of FIG. 34, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU). Thus, image display control for the liquid crystal display device 36 is executed. Thereby, the image production along the production scenario is realized.

  Next, the director action operation management is performed (step S94). In this director action operation management, a control signal is output to the movable accessory motor 61 through the drive control section based on the motor control data for the movable accessory created in the director bonus control data update process (step S77). To do. Thereby, the visual production | presentation by the movable body accessory along a production | presentation scenario is implement | achieved.

  Next, effect LED management is performed (step S95). In this effect LED management, the decorative lamp unit 45 and the LED are turned on and blinked through the light display control unit based on the LED data created in the LED data update process (step S75). Thereby, the light effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

  Next, a main loop update process for managing the main loop update period is performed (step S96). In this main loop update process, the main loop update cycle counter is updated for each interrupt (main loop update cycle counter + 1). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that circulates in a range of multiples of 16 (for example, 0 to 31) by increment processing, for example.

  After the processing of steps S91 to S96 is completed, the saved register contents are restored (step S97). As a result, the timer interruption process is terminated, the process returns to the effect control side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<Contents of Received Command Analysis Process: FIGS. 37 to 39>
FIGS. 37 to 39 show processes closely related to the prefetching notice effect among the processes executed in the received command analysis process (step S73 in FIG. 34). Hereinafter, a case where a “hold addition command”, a “variation pattern designation command”, and a “decorative symbol designation command” are received will be described.

(14. Processing for receiving pending addition command: FIG. 37)
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a pending addition command is received. This hold addition command is an effect control command transmitted in step S326 of the special figure 1 start opening check process of FIG. 10 or step S346 of the special figure 2 start opening check process of FIG.

  In FIG. 37, when receiving the hold addition command, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first analyzes the contents of the command and acquires prefetch determination result information (step S711). Here, the acquired information is stored in the prefetch information storage area of the RAM 203. In the pre-read information storage area, the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2) as in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 A pre-read information storage area corresponding to the side) is provided. In addition, these pre-read information storage areas are provided with a hold 1 pre-read information storage area to a hold n pre-read information storage area (in this embodiment, n = 4) corresponding to the number of active hold balls. Prefetch determination result information for the number of balls can be stored. For example, if the hold addition command received this time is a command “B707H”, the CPU 241 grasps the content of “special figure 1 hold 2 designation, strong SP reach A, and lose B” (prefetch fluctuation pattern X7). This is stored in the reserved 2 prefetch information storage area on the special symbol 1 side. As a result, it is possible to specify what kind of pre-reading determination result the existing operation holding ball has. In the case of “** 01H” (“**” on the MODE side is B5 to BE), “prefetching prohibited” is designated (see FIG. 49).

  Next, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the analysis information of the process in step S711 (step 712). If prefetching is prohibited (step S712: YES), nothing is done and the process proceeds to step S718 described later.

  If prefetching is not prohibited (step S712: NO), the process proceeds to step S713, and it is determined whether or not the “continuous notice counter” is zero (step S713). The “continuous notice counter” is a counter for setting a prohibition period for prohibiting the occurrence of the pre-read notice effect. Specifically, when the current operation-holding ball is selected as the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect by the pre-reading notice lottery in step S714 described below (when the pre-reading notice lottery is won), the current operation-holding ball is digested. This is a counter for preventing the newly generated operation holding ball from being subject to execution of the pre-reading effect until it is subjected to the variable display operation. In the “continuous notice counter”, the value of the current number of suspended balls is stored for the above-described reason (see step S717 described later).

  If the continuous notice counter is not zero (step S713: NO), it is determined that the prefetch notice lottery is prohibited, and the process proceeds to step S718 without doing anything.

  If the value of the continuous notice counter is zero (step S713: YES), prefetch notice lottery processing is performed assuming that the prefetch notice lottery is permitted (step S714). In this pre-reading notice lottery process, based on the pre-reading variation pattern information, whether or not “holding display changing system (change system at winning) pre-reading notice effect” (hereinafter referred to as “holding pre-reading notice effect”) can be executed, and “image It is determined by lottery whether or not the display change system (change system at the start of change) pre-reading notice effect (hereinafter referred to as “background pre-reading notice effect”) can be executed. The pre-reading notice lottery is performed on the condition that there is no variation pattern type with reach among the pre-reading variation patterns related to the existing operation holding ball. The presence / absence of the variation pattern with reach can be confirmed by confirming the information in the pre-read information storage area on the special symbol 1 side if the pending addition command this time relates to the operation holding ball on the special symbol 1 side. If it is related to the operation holding ball on the side, it can be performed by checking the information in the pre-read information storage area on the special symbol 2 side. Note that if the prefetch determination result information this time is “indefinite (normal fluctuation / reach)”, the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation may be a fluctuation pattern with reach. It is preferable to consider.

  In this embodiment, only when generating the “hold pre-reading notice effect”, the “background pre-reading notice effect” is generated redundantly to clearly indicate which operation holding ball is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. At the same time, you will be able to win a big win. Accordingly, in the pre-reading notice lottery, (I) only the pre-reading pre-order notice effect can be executed, (II) both the pre-reading pre-order notice effect and the background pre-reading notice effect can be executed, or (III) any pre-reading notice is available. Three cases, such as whether or not to execute, are determined by lottery. Which case is determined depends on the “pre-reading notice lottery table (not shown)” associated with the winning type (in this embodiment, the big hit type, the small hit type, the loss type) and / or the contents of the pre-reading variation pattern. Is determined. In this look-ahead notice lottery table, the above (III) has the lowest chance of winning a big hit, and the case of (II) tends to have a higher chance of winning a big win than the case of (I) above. The selectivity of (I) to (III) above is defined. Specifically, in consideration of the winning type determined by the main control unit 20 and the selection rate of the look-ahead variation pattern, a reach type (for example, a weak SP reach A type or a weak SP reach) having a relatively low expectation of winning the big hit In the case of (B type), the selection rate of the above case (I) is relatively high, and in the case of a big win, or a reach type with a relatively high expectation degree of big win (for example, strong SP reach A type or strong SP reach) In the case of (B type), the selection rate in the case (II) is set to be relatively high. In the case of the normal variation pattern type, the selection rate of the case (III) is determined to be relatively high.

  In the prefetch notice lottery, in addition to the above (I) to (III), (IV) whether or not only the background prefetch notice effect can be executed may be included. When (V) a pre-reading effect (moving material pre-reading notice effect) by a movable object (not shown) is configured to be executable, the movable object is designated as “hold pre-reading notice effect” and / or “background”. A case where a lottery is performed with or without the pre-reading notice effect 'may be included. When (IV) and / or (V) are included, it is determined on the main control unit 20 side which of the cases (I) to (V) is likely to result in a high probability of winning big hits It can be freely determined in consideration of the selection rate of the selected winning type and the selection rate of the look-ahead variation pattern.

  Next, as a result of the pre-reading notice lottery in step S714, it is determined that the pre-reading effect can be executed. In the case of (I), the pre-reading operation status is “01H”, and in the case of (II), the pre-reading operation status is “02H”. "Is determined not to execute any pre-reading notice in (III) above," 00H "is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 243 as the pre-reading operation status (step S715).

  Next, the prefetch determination operation status is determined (step 716). If the pre-reading operation status is “00H” (step S716: = 00H), the pre-reading notice effect is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S718 without doing anything.

  On the other hand, when the pre-reading operation status is other than “00H” (step S716: ≠ 00H), the number of suspended balls (the number of reserved memories) is stored in the continuous notice counter (step S717). For example, if the hold addition command received this time is a command “B706H”, since the command is “special figure 1 hold 2 designation”, the continuous notice counter indicates “02H” indicating 2 holds. Is stored. As a result, the pre-reading notice lottery for a new operation holding ball is prohibited for a certain period. Note that this counter value is decremented by one each time an old operation holding ball generated earlier is digested in the process of receiving a decorative design designation command shown in FIG.

  When the process proceeds to step S718, a pending addition display process is performed (step S718). In the hold addition display process, the effect data related to the hold display of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is stored in the hold display data storage area (hold display scenario setting area) of the RAM 243 based on the result of the hold prefetch notice lottery. Store. In the reserved display data storage area, the reserved display data storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (special symbol 1 reserved display data storage corresponding to the special symbol 1 is stored) as in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. Area and special figure 2 hold display data storage area corresponding to special symbol 2). These hold display data storage areas are provided with a hold 1 display data storage area to a hold n display data storage area (n is the maximum hold display number: in this embodiment, n = 4), and each holds a maximum operation hold ball. It is possible to store presentation scenario data for several minutes of hold display. The CPU 241 can specify what kind of hold display is to be performed on the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 with reference to the hold display effect scenario data in the hold display data storage area. Yes.

  With respect to the above-described presentation scenario for hold display, if the “prefetching notice lottery” in step S714 is not won (lost) (prefetching notice operation status = 00H), the presentation data for normal holding display (for example, the hold icon) ("Blue" effect data) is stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading notice lottery is won (pre-reading notice operation status ≠ 00H), the presentation data for the hold pre-read notice (dedicated hold display) (for example, the hold icon “blue, yellow, green, red, or rainbow”) Production data) is stored. Note that the number of colors to be reserved is determined based on the “reserved color selection table (not shown) associated with the winning type (in this embodiment, the big hit type, the small hit type, the loss type) and / or the contents of the prefetch variation pattern. ) ". In this reserved color selection table, the selection rate of the reserved color is determined so that the big hit winning expectation tends to be high due to the relationship of “blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow color (true)”. For example, “Large hit” is more likely to be selected than “Lost”, and if the reach type has a relatively high expectation level for winning a big hit, a reserved color with a high expectation level for winning a big hit will be selected with a high probability. Yes.

  In this embodiment, when the “pre-reading notice lottery” is won, the color of the holding icon related to the action holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is, for example, one of yellow, green, red, or rainbow colors (usually It changes to blue), and the hold display appears continuously until the operation hold ball is digested (until it is used for the variable display operation) (FIG. 6 (1)). To (4)). Although details will be described later, when the “background prefetching notice effect” is also selected at the same time, a prefetching notice effect (lightning effect) by a dedicated notice image (lightning image) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 together with the hold prefetching notice effect. Appearing, the pre-reading notice effect (lightning effect) by the lightning image appears continuously (see FIGS. 6 (1) to (4)).

  The pre-reading notice lottery process of step S714 is performed based on the pre-reading determination result (first pre-reading determination unit on the special figure 1 side or second pre-reading determination unit on the special figure 2 side) with the effect start condition (pre-reading determination). It functions as a notice execution determination means for determining whether or not to execute a prefetch notice effect that notifies information related to the prefetch determination result on the condition that an effect control command including information (hold addition command) has been received. Further, in the processing of step S718 or steps S755 to S760 described later, the pre-reading notice effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display means (liquid crystal display device 36) when the notice effect determination means determines that the notice effect can be executed. It works as a notice effect control means for controlling the appearance.

  In the present embodiment, the form in which the pre-reading notice effect of both the hold display change system and the image display change system is generated by the image display on the liquid crystal display device 36 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pre-reading notice effect of the hold display system is configured so that the pre-reading notice effect of the image display change system can be displayed by the separate display means by the liquid crystal display device 36 by the holding display provided at the appropriate position of the pachinko machine 1. May be. In this case, the advance notice control means includes a hold prefetch notice control effect means for controlling the appearance of the hold display change type prefetch notice effect on a dedicated hold indicator (not shown), and a decorative symbol display means ( The liquid crystal display device 36) may include a function unit as image prefetching notice control means for controlling the appearance of the image display changing system prefetching notice effect. Further, the pre-reading notice effect may be expressed by an operation mode of a movable body accessory (not shown) provided at an appropriate position of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, the notice effect control means may include a movable body control means for controlling the appearance of the pre-read notice effect for the movable object.

(15. Reception process of variation pattern designation command: FIG. 38)
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a variation pattern designation command is received. This variation pattern designation command is an effect control command transmitted in step S412 of the special symbol variation pattern creation process of FIG.

  In FIG. 38, when the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives the variation pattern designation command, it first analyzes the content of the command (step S731), acquires the variation pattern information of the special symbol that is the content, and the RAM 243. In the predetermined area (step S732). The effect scenario during the symbol variation display game is not yet determined at this point, and is determined when the decorative symbol designation command sent following the variation pattern designation command is received. That is, based on the variation pattern information stored here and the information (special symbol determination data information) included in the decorative symbol designation command, an effect scenario in the symbol variation display game is determined.

(16. Decoration Symbol Designation Command Reception Processing: FIG. 39)
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a decorative symbol designation command is received. This decoration symbol designation command is an effect control command transmitted in step S415 of the special symbol variation start process in FIG.

  In FIG. 39, when the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives the decoration symbol designation command, it first analyzes the content of the command and acquires the content (step S751).

  Next, a decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process is performed (step S752). In this stop decorative symbol lottery process, the left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol (decorative symbol) to be finally stopped based on the variation pattern information obtained in step S732 and the winning type information included in the decorative symbol designation command. Each stop symbol combination) is determined by lottery. For example, in the hit variation pattern with reach state, if the big hit type at that time is 15R long open probability variable big hit, first the left symbol is drawn and the left symbol and the decorative symbol that can form the reach state as the right symbol Based on the determined left symbol and right symbol, the middle symbol is determined so as to be finally stopped at the decorative symbol sequence related to the 15R long open probability variation jackpot. As a result, the combination of decorative symbols when the current decorative symbol variation display game is completed is determined. Then, the determined decorative symbol data is stored in the decorative symbol data storage area of the RAM 243.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice counter is zero (step S753). If the continuous notice counter is zero (step S753: YES), the process proceeds to step S757 without doing anything.

  If the continuous notice counter is not zero (step S753: NO), then the prefetch operation status is acquired and determined (step S755). When the prefetch operation status is other than “02H” (step S755: ≠ 02H), the process proceeds to step S757 without doing anything.

  If the pre-reading operation status is “02H” (step S755: = 02H), the background pre-reading notice effect is executed in this case, so that the process proceeds to step S756 and the background pre-reading notice setting process is performed (step S756). In this background prefetching notice setting process, first, one of the background prefetching notice effects is selected by lottery from a plurality of types of background prefetching notice effects based on the variation pattern information obtained in step S732. For example, one lightning effect is selected by lottery from among a plurality of types of lightning effects including lightning effects of lightning strikes, lightning effects of lightning strikes of lightning strikes, and lightning effects of lightning strikes. . Which lightning effect is to be generated is determined by a “lightning effect selection table (not shown)” associated with the variation pattern. In this lightning effect selection table, the selection rate of the lightning effect type is determined so that the expectation level for winning a big hit tends to be high due to the relationship “lightning lightning <medium lightning <strong lightning”.

  As already explained, since the “look-ahead variation pattern” determined at the time of winning a prize and the “basic pattern related to the variation pattern at the start of variation” determined at the start of variation, substantially the same pattern type is selected. The expectation of winning a big hit with the hold color of the hold icon and the expectation of winning a big hit with lightning are closely related. In more detail, the chances of winning big wins are indicated more clearly when the hold-ahead preview effect and the background-ahead preview effect appear more than when the hold-ahead preview effect appears alone. It has become. For example, if the reserved color is “red” and the lightning effect is “strong lightning”, the expectation of winning the jackpot will increase dramatically, but even if the reserved color is “red”, the lightning effect will be “weak lightning”. If this is the case, the expectation of winning a big hit will be lower than that. As described above, in the present embodiment, a clearer win-winning expectation degree is suggested when a plurality of pre-reading notice effects are mixed than when a single pre-reading notice effect appears.

  In the background prefetching notice setting process, the number of executions of the background prefetching notice effect is set to the same value as the value of the continuous counter (the value of the continuous counter is stored in the background notice execution counter), and the prefetching operation status is switched to “00H” ( 00H is stored in the pre-read operation status). As a result, when it is determined that the background pre-reading notice effect is to be executed when the one hold addition command is received, the background pre-reading notice setting process is performed at the start of the fluctuation of the oldest action-holding ball generated first. When another subsequent hold addition command is received, this background prefetching notice setting process is not performed unless the continuous notice counter is zero and the prefetching operation status is “02H”. In other words, in the present embodiment, unless the operation holding ball that is the target of the prefetching notice effect is digested, a new prefetching notice effect is not generated, and the generation of duplicate prefetching notice effects is prohibited.

  Next, when the process proceeds to step S756, 1 is subtracted from the continuous notice counter as the digestion of the currently activated ball (step S756).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the background notice execution counter is zero (step S757). If the background notice execution counter is not zero (step S757: NO), 1 is subtracted from the background notice execution counter as the digestion of the currently activated ball (step S758). Proceed to the production scenario setting process with lightning production. On the other hand, if the background notice execution counter is zero (step S757: YES), the background prefetch notice effect is not executed, and the process proceeds to the effect scenario setting process without lightning effect in step S761.

  In the effect scenario setting process with lightning effect in step S758, an effect scenario including a lightning effect that is a background look-ahead notice is determined as a notice effect that appears during the current decorative symbol variation display game. Thus, when one of the lightning effects is selected as the background prefetching notice effect, a lightning image appears in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 at the start of the change (see FIG. 6B). On the other hand, in the non-lightning effect production scenario setting process in step S761, the production scenario excluding the lightning effect that is the background pre-reading notice is determined. The production scenario determines multiple types of notice production as part production based on the information (variation pattern information, winning type, etc.) included in the fluctuation pattern designation command and decorative design designation command and the current production mode. An effect scenario is constructed, and this data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243.

  When the above-described effect scenario setting process is completed, various setting processes required for starting the decorative symbol variation display game are performed (step S760). Here, various settings required for starting the decorative symbol variation display game including the hold display shift process are performed. In the hold display shift process, the hold display data storage area (hold 2 display data storage area, hold 3) corresponding to the hold display data n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) as the decorative symbol variation effect is started. Display data storage area and hold 4 display data storage area) are overwritten on the hold display data storage area corresponding to 'n-1', respectively, and an empty area is provided in the hold 4 display data storage area. . Since the display scenario data for hold display is not stored in the hold display data storage area that is an empty area, in this case, the hold display effect is not performed, and the corresponding display location is displayed as an unlit state. As a result, the CPU 241 refers to the on-hold display effect scenario stored in the on-hold display data storage area and performs an effect display in which the position of the existing on-hold display unit is shifted to the old storage position as a whole. At the start of the decorative symbol variation display game, the hold display expressing the state where the operation hold ball is digested is performed. Note that the prefetch information storage area of the RAM 203 is also stored in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the hold n prefetch information storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) in the same manner as the above-described shift processing of the hold display data storage area. The prefetch determination result information is overwritten in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to 'n-1', an empty area is provided in the hold 4 prefetch information storage area, and the next hold addition command is received. An area for storing the result information is secured.

  When the process of step S760 is completed, the decorative symbol designation command receiving process is exited, and thereafter, the decorative symbol variation display game is started. In this way, the effect control unit 24 receives the first control command (holding addition command), and the symbol game (symbol variation) in which the predetermined variation start condition is not satisfied and the holding information is not yet digested. A display effect control means for controlling the appearance of a notice effect (pre-reading notice effect) for notifying information about what display result of the display result of the symbol game based on the hold information is, On the condition that the control command (variation pattern designation command) is received (in this embodiment, on the condition that the decorative symbol designation command following the fluctuation pattern designation command is received), the effect display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) 36. A symbol game execution control means for starting execution of the decorative symbol game (decorative symbol variation display game) in 36) is included.

  The present invention is useful for a game machine using a game ball or a game medium corresponding thereto.

1 Pachinko machine,
2 Front frame,
3 Game board,
3a gaming area,
4 outer frame,
5 ball guide rail,
6 Glass door,
7 Front operation panel
8 Upper tray unit,
9 Top saucer,
11 Ball rental button,
12 Card return button,
13 Frame production button,
14 Ball release button,
15 Launch control handle,
19 game ball dispensing device,
20 Main control unit,
21 External terminal board for frame,
24 production control unit,
28 Launch control board,
29 payout control board,
31 power supply board,
32 launcher,
34 Upper starting port,
34a Upper start sensor,
35 Lower starting port,
35a Lower start sensor,
36 liquid crystal display devices,
37 Normal design starting port,
37a Normal design start sensor,
38a, 38b Special symbol display device,
39c LED display 38c for holding composite display
39a Normal symbol display device,
39b Round number display device,
40, 50 Big prize opening,
41 Ordinary variable winning device,
41c Ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
42,52 Special variable prize device,
42a, 52a Big prize opening sensor,
42b, 52b open door,
42c, 52c
43 General prize opening,
43a General prize opening sensor,
44 Windmill,
45 Decorative lamp,
45a optical display device,
46 Speaker,
46a sound generator,
47 Movable wing pieces,
48 Center decoration,
49 Out mouth,
71 Movable body accessory motor,
201 main control CPU,
202 main control ROM,
203 main control RAM,
241 Production control CPU,
242 Production control ROM,
243 Production control RAM.

Claims (1)

Game control means for comprehensively controlling game operation processing related to the progress of the game,
A symbol display means for executing a stunning symbol variation display game accompanied by a game symbol variation display operation and deriving and displaying a display result;
Based on a control command transmitted from the game control means, the production control means for comprehensively controlling the production operation processing including the game symbol variation display operation for the symbol display means,
After a specific result is derived and displayed as a display result of the symbol variation display game, in a ball game machine configured to be able to generate a special game state advantageous to the player,
The game control means includes
An acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information including a plurality of types of variation pattern random numbers and a hit determination random number when a game ball enters the start opening,
Reservation memory for reserving and storing the predetermined game information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined maximum retentive storage number until being used for execution of the game symbol variable display operation Means,
Performs lottery processing based on the per determining random number, and selecting means for determining whether or not to generate the special game state,
Fluctuation pattern lottery means for performing lottery processing based on the lottery result by the lottery means and the random numbers for the plurality of types of variation patterns, and determining the variation pattern of the game symbol from among a plurality of types of variation patterns
A change start time command transmission means for transmitting to the effect control means a first control command including at least information capable of specifying the change pattern determined by the change pattern lottery means ;
A plurality of determination values related to a specific variation pattern random number among the plurality of types of variation pattern random numbers are assigned, and based on which determination value the specific variation pattern random number belongs to, wherein as variable display operation of the gaming symbols as a base for what executes the variable display operation in the variation pattern, either the variation pattern from among a plurality of types of variation pattern types are grouped according to a system with a variation pattern type is configured to be specified change pattern classification sorting table, a,
In the variation pattern type distribution table, the variation pattern type distribution table for losing used when the lottery means decides not to generate the special game state, and the special game state is generated by the lottery means. And a variation pattern type allocation table for use used when it is determined,
The variation pattern lottery means
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, the variation pattern type distribution table selection means for selecting either the variation pattern type distribution table for loss and the variation pattern type distribution table for winning;
It has a hierarchical structure and is configured to identify the variation pattern by hierarchical processing executed in order from the first layer, and the first layer selected by the variation pattern type distribution table selection unit Referring to a variation pattern type distribution table, variation pattern type determination means for determining the variation pattern type based on the random number for the specific variation pattern;
After the first hierarchy, referring to a variation pattern table used for determining the variation pattern, for other variation patterns other than the specific variation pattern random number among the plurality of types of variation pattern random numbers. Fluctuation pattern determining means for determining one fluctuation pattern from one or a plurality of fluctuation patterns belonging to the fluctuation pattern type determined by the fluctuation pattern type determining means based on a random number,
The game control means further includes:
Pre-fetch lottery means for pre-determining in advance what the lottery result by the lottery means will be before the lottery process by the lottery means is executed;
A pre-reading variation pattern determination unit that determines in advance in advance what kind of variation pattern type the variation pattern type is determined by the variation pattern lottery unit before the variation process by the variation pattern lottery unit is executed. ,
A prefetch determination command transmission means for transmitting a second control command including at least information capable of specifying the variation pattern type determined by the prefetch fluctuation pattern determination means to the effect control means ,
The prefetch fluctuation pattern determination means includes
Based on the prefetch determination result by the prefetch lottery means, the prefetch fluctuation pattern type distribution table selection means for selecting either the fluctuation pattern type distribution table for loss or the variation pattern type distribution table for winning;
With reference to the variation pattern type distribution table selected by the prefetch variation pattern type distribution table selection means, the variation pattern type determination means determines what the variation pattern type is based on the random number for the specific variation pattern. Pre-reading variation pattern type determination means for pre-determining whether to be determined in advance ,
The production control means includes
On the basis of receiving the first control command, the symbol game execution control means for executing and controlling the variable display operation of the symbol game in the symbol display means;
Based on the reception of the second control command, prefetching that informs at least one of the symbol display means and the predetermined rendering means of information related to the prefetch determination result by the prefetch variation pattern determination means Including pre-reading notice control means for controlling the notice effect to appear ,
In the variation pattern type distribution table,
Corresponding to a plurality of determination values related to the specific variation pattern random number, variation pattern table specifying data for specifying the variation pattern table referred to when determining the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination means;
As the information related to the variation pattern type at the time of the prefetch determination that can specify the variation pattern type necessary for the prefetch notice control means to control the appearance of the prefetch notice effect, it is transmitted by the command transmission means during the prefetch determination Command data constituting the second control command is stored .
A ball game machine characterized by that.

Images